Psion WCF2011BE HANDHELD TERMINAL User Manual 7535May16
Psion Inc HANDHELD TERMINAL 7535May16
Psion >
USERS MANUAL
ISO 9001 Certified
Quality Management System
7535 Hand-Held
Computer
User Manual
May 16, 2003 Part No. 8000007.A
© Copyright 2003 by Psion Teklogix Inc., Mississauga, Ontario
This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc.,
is issued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in
part, except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured
goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for
design, manufacture, or sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests
of Psion Teklogix Inc.
All trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Return-To-Factory Warranty
Psion Teklogix warrants a return-to-factory warranty for a period of one year from
shipment. The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend
to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other
than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization. See Psion
Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details.
Service
When requesting service, please provide information concerning the nature of the
failure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurred.
Type, model, and serial number should also be provided. Before returning any
products to the factory, call the Customer Services Group for a Return
Authorization number.
Support Services
Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its custom-
ers. In North America, these services can be accessed through the Psion Teklogix
Helpdesk. The Helpdesk coordinates repairs and training, helps you to troubleshoot
problems over the phone and arranges for technicians or engineers to come to your
site. For contact information and a listing of worldwide offices, please refer to
Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices.
Disclaimer
Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate and up-to-date.
Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make changes without notice and shall not be
held responsible for damages resulting from reliance on the material presented in
this manual.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual I
PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENT
Microsoft's End User License Agreement
You have acquired an item (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed from
Microsoft Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (“MS”). Those installed software products
of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or elec-
tronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by copyright laws and interna-
tional copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
(“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE.
INSTEAD, CONTACT PSION TEKLOGIX INC IMMEDIATELY FOR
INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A
REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF LICENSE. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. This EULA grants
you the following rights to the SOFTWARE:
• You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
• NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLER-
ANT. PSION TEKLOGIX INC. HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETER-
MINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS
HAS RELIED UPON PSION TEKLOIGX INC. TO CONDUCT SUFFI-
CIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUIT-
ABLE FOR SUCH USE.
License Agreement
II Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is
provided “AS IS” and with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY, AND
EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU.
ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH
YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST
INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES
REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRAN-
TIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDING ON, MS.
• Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs
written in Java. Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed,
manufactured, or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in
hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication sys-
tems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems,
in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death, per-
sonal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. Sun Microsys-
tems, Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer.
• No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW,
MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT
SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S.
TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You
may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE,
except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You
may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a perma-
nent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all
prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual III
License Agreement
• EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. If these licensing terms are not labeled “North
America Only Version” and the SOFTWARE is not identified as “North
America Only Version” on the SOFTWARE packaging or other written
materials, then the following terms apply: Export of the Department,
Bureau of Export Administration (BXA). You agree to comply with the
EAR in the export or re-export of the SOFTWARE: (i) to any country to
which the U.S. has embargoed or restricted the export of goods or services,
which as of May 1999 include, but are not necessarily limited to Cuba, Iran,
Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Sudan, Syria, and the Federal Republic or Yugo-
slavia (including Serbia, but not Montenegro), or to any national of any
such country, wherever located, who intends to transmit or transport the
SOFTWARE back to such country; (ii) to any person or entity who you
know or have reason to know will utilize the SOFTWARE or portion
thereof in the design, development or production of nuclear, chemical, or
biological weapons; or (iii) to any person or entity who has been prohibited
from participating in U.S. export transactions by any federal agency or the
U.S. government. You warrant and represent that neither the BXA nor any
other U.S. federal agency has suspended, revoked or denied your export
privileges. For additional information see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Program License Agreement ..............................I
Approvals And Safety Summary ...........................xi
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.1 About This Manual ............................3
1.2 Text Conventions.............................4
1.3 About The 7535 Hand-Held Computer ..................5
1.3.1 Features...............................5
1.3.2 The 7535 Hand-Held Computer ..................7
1.3.3 The 7535 Hand-Held Safety Labels ................9
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
2.1 Preparing The 7535 For Operation ....................13
2.1.1 Equipment You Need To Get Started ...............13
2.1.2 Charging The Battery .......................13
2.1.3 Attaching Carrying Accessories ..................13
2.1.3.1 Attaching The Hand Strap ................14
2.1.3.2 Attaching The Pistol Grip ................15
2.2 Powering Up The 7535 And Configuring The Radio ...........16
2.2.1 Installing The Battery And Switching The 7535 On........17
2.2.2 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio ................18
2.3 Advanced NETWLAN Settings......................22
2.3.1 Preferred Networks.........................23
2.3.2 Advanced Network Access.....................23
2.3.3 Configuring WEP Keys ......................24
2.4 Additional Radio Security Options....................28
2.5 Checking The Scanner ..........................29
2.6 Uploading New Applications.......................29
2.7 Calibrating The Touchscreen.......................30
Contents
ii Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
2.8 Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held .....................30
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
3.1 Features Of The 7535 ..........................33
3.2 The Battery................................34
3.2.1 Battery Safety ...........................34
3.2.2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack ...........34
3.2.3 Charging The Battery .......................35
3.3 Switching The 7535 Hand-Held On And Off ..............36
3.4 The Keyboard ..............................37
3.4.1 Modifier Keys...........................38
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys................39
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys.................39
3.4.2 The Keys .............................39
3.4.3 The 58-Key Keyboard ......................40
3.4.4 The 36-Key Keyboard ......................40
3.4.5 The Keypad Backlight ......................42
3.5 The Display...............................43
3.5.1 Adjusting The Display Backlight.................43
3.5.2 Adjusting The Contrast On Monochrome Displays .......43
3.5.3 Calibrating The Touchscreen ...................44
3.6 7535 Hand-Held Computer Indicators..................45
3.6.1 LEDs ...............................45
3.6.1.1 Charge LEDs ......................46
3.6.1.2 Radio Traffic LEDs...................46
3.6.1.3 Scan LEDs .......................47
3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators........................47
3.6.3 Audio Indicators .........................49
3.6.3.1 Adjusting The Beeper Volume .............49
3.7 Internal Scanners.............................50
3.7.1 Warnings .............................51
3.7.2 Scanning Techniques .......................51
3.7.3 Scan LED Indicators .......................52
3.7.4 Troubleshooting..........................52
3.7.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners....53
3.7.6 Operating Internal PDF Laser Scanners .............53
3.7.7 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imager Scanners . . 53
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual iii
Contents
3.8 Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals............54
3.9 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time ...........55
3.10 Monitoring The Network Connection...................57
3.11 Uploading Data In A Docking Station ..................57
3.12 General Maintenance ...........................58
3.12.1 Caring For The Touchscreen....................58
3.12.2 Cleaning The 7535 .........................58
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
4.1 Navigating In Windows CE And Applications..............61
4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus ...........61
4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard..................61
4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs ...............62
4.3 The Startup Desktop............................63
4.3.1 Accessing Desktop Icons......................63
4.3.2 The Taskbar ............................64
4.3.2.1 Using The Taskbar ....................64
4.4 The System Menu.............................65
4.5 Using A Dialogue Box ..........................68
Chapter 5: Configuration
5.1 The Control Panel .............................73
5.2 Control Panel Icons ............................74
5.3 Basic Setup................................76
5.3.1 Display Properties .........................76
5.3.1.1 Display Contrast .....................77
5.3.1.2 Display Backlight ....................77
5.3.1.3 Display Appearance ...................79
5.3.2 Keyboard Properties ........................80
5.3.2.1 Key Repeat........................80
5.3.2.2 Keyboard Backlight ...................81
5.3.2.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes ...............82
5.3.3 Power Management Properties...................83
5.3.3.1 Battery Capacity .....................83
5.3.3.2 Power Saving Schemes .................84
5.3.4 Calibrating The Touchscreen ...................85
5.4 Advanced Configuration .........................86
Contents
iv Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.5 Scanner Properties ............................86
5.5.1 Scanner Options..........................87
5.5.2 Bar Codes .............................89
5.5.3 Bar Code Settings.........................90
5.5.3.1 Code 39 Settings ....................90
5.5.3.2 Code 128 Settings ...................93
5.5.3.3 EAN 13 Settings ....................94
5.5.3.4 EAN 8 .........................96
5.5.3.5 UPC And EAN Settings ................97
5.5.3.6 UPC A Settings.....................97
5.5.3.7 UPC E Settings .....................98
5.5.3.8 Codabar Size And Characters .............99
5.5.3.9 Code 93 Size And Characters .............99
5.5.3.10 Code 11.........................100
5.5.3.11 I 2 of 5 Settings.....................101
5.5.3.12 MSI/PLESSY Settings .................102
5.5.3.13 D 2 of 5 Settings ....................103
5.5.3.14 IATA 2 of 5 Settings ..................104
5.5.3.15 Postal: Australian ....................104
5.5.3.16 Postal: Japanese ....................105
5.5.3.17 Postal: Korean .....................105
5.5.3.18 Postal: PlaNET .....................105
5.5.3.19 Postal: PostNET ....................105
5.5.3.20 Postal: Royal Mail ...................105
5.5.3.21 DataMatrix (2D) ....................106
5.5.3.22 Maxicode (2D) .....................106
5.5.3.23 PDF-417 (2D) .....................106
5.5.3.24 Micro PDF-417 (2D) ..................107
5.5.3.25 QR Code (2D) .....................107
5.5.3.26 RSS Code (2D) .....................107
5.5.3.27 Aztec ..........................107
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
6.1 The Tekterm Application.........................113
6.2 Additional Keyboard Functions .....................113
6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkey Function Keys ...........113
6.2.1.1 Function Keys .....................113
6.2.1.2 Softkey Function Keys .................114
6.2.2 Macro Keys ............................115
6.3 Keyboard Modes.............................116
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual v
Contents
6.3.1 View Mode ............................116
6.3.1.1 Changing Font Sizes..................116
6.3.1.2 Panning The Screen Contents .............116
6.3.1.3 Exiting View Mode ..................117
6.3.2 Menu Mode And Switching Between Applications .......118
6.3.2.1 Using The Task Manager To Switch Between Applications
118
6.4 The Tekterm Status Area........................119
6.5 TESS Emulation.............................120
6.5.1 Configuration...........................120
6.5.2 Working With Multiple Sessions ................120
6.5.3 The Field Types .........................120
6.5.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys....................121
6.5.5 Data Entry ............................121
6.5.5.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement ......122
6.5.5.2 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS ...........123
6.5.5.3 <BKSP> Key Behaviour In TESS...........124
6.5.6 TESS Status Message ......................125
6.5.7 Lock Messages ..........................126
6.5.8 Control Commands........................126
6.5.9 Resetting A TESS Session ....................126
6.5.10 The Local Menu .........................127
6.5.11 Selecting Another Host Computer ................127
6.5.12 Queuing Mode ..........................128
6.6 ANSI Emulation.............................128
6.6.1 Configuration...........................128
6.6.2 Sending Data To The Host ....................129
6.6.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys ....129
6.6.4 Block Mode (Local Editing) ...................130
6.6.5 Working With Sessions .....................131
6.6.5.1 Establishing A New Session ..............131
6.6.5.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions . . . 131
6.6.5.3 Closing A Session ...................131
6.6.5.4 Printing A Screen ...................132
6.6.5.5 Smart Echo – Disabling ................132
6.7 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu...................132
6.8 Working With Menus ..........................133
6.8.1 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus .......133
Contents
vi Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.8.1.1 Sub-Menus .......................133
6.8.1.2 Numeric Parameters ..................134
6.8.1.3 Y/N Parameters.....................134
6.8.1.4 Alpha Parameters....................134
6.8.1.5 String Entry Parameters ................135
6.8.2 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus......137
6.8.2.1 Sub-Menus .......................137
6.8.2.2 Numeric Parameters ..................137
6.8.2.3 Y/N Parameters.....................138
6.8.2.4 Alpha Parameters....................138
6.8.2.5 String Entry Parameters ................138
6.8.3 Saving Changes To Parameters..................138
6.8.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values...............139
6.9 Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held Computer ...............139
6.10 The Parameters Menu ..........................139
6.10.1 Security Settings .........................140
6.11 Display Options .............................140
6.12 More Parameters .............................141
6.13 Radio Parameters ............................142
6.14 System Parameters ............................145
6.14.1 Keyboard .............................145
6.14.1.1 Macros .........................145
6.14.1.2 Indicators ........................148
6.14.1.3 Softkeys.........................149
6.14.1.4 Cntrl Panel .......................149
6.14.2 Audio ...............................150
6.14.3 Power Mgmt ...........................151
6.14.4 Security ..............................151
6.14.4.1 Default Mode......................151
6.14.4.2 User Level Options ...................152
6.14.4.3 Sup. Password .....................152
6.15 Scanner Control Panel ..........................153
6.16 View Manager ..............................154
6.16.1 Split Screen ............................155
6.16.1.1 Splitting And Displaying Screens ...........155
6.16.1.2 Moving Between Split Screens.............156
6.16.1.3 Toggling Between Full & Split Screens ........156
6.16.1.4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card ..........157
6.16.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™) .................157
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual vii
Contents
6.16.2.1 Creating A Unicode™ Character ...........157
6.16.2.2 Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window .....158
6.17 Applications ...............................160
6.17.1 ANSI Settings ..........................161
6.17.1.1 Host Conn .......................162
6.17.1.2 Screen .........................163
6.17.1.3 Xmit Modes ......................166
6.17.1.4 Kbd Modes.......................170
6.17.1.5 Edit Modes.......................173
6.17.1.6 Serial ..........................174
6.17.1.7 Host Char Set .....................174
6.17.1.8 Anchor View ......................175
6.17.2 TESS Settings ..........................176
6.17.2.1 Host Conn. .......................177
6.17.2.2 Screen .........................178
6.17.2.3 Characters .......................180
6.17.2.4 Tests ..........................182
6.17.2.5 Features ........................183
6.17.2.6 Scanner.........................186
6.17.2.7 Fields..........................188
6.17.2.8 Anchor View ......................190
6.18 Ports– Tether And Console .......................191
6.18.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options ..........191
6.18.2 Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings ..........192
6.18.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters .........195
6.18.3.1 Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport ....195
6.18.3.2 Scan-See Keyboard Mapping .............200
6.19 Network .................................201
6.19.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings ...................201
6.19.1.1 NETWLAN – Configuring The Radio ........202
6.19.2 802.IQ v2.............................202
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
7.1 External Bar Code Readers .......................207
7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners . . . 207
7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader............207
7.2 The 7535 Battery ............................207
7.2.1 Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions .............208
7.3 Important Charger Safety Instructions .................209
Contents
viii Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7.4 Chargers.................................210
7.5 Gang Charger ..............................210
7.5.1 Installation ............................210
7.5.2 Operator Controls .........................211
7.5.3 Charge Indicators .........................211
7.5.4 Charging Batteries ........................212
7.5.5 Troubleshooting..........................212
7.5.5.1 Excessive Charge Duration...............212
7.5.5.2 Indicator Flashing Red .................212
7.5.5.3 Power LED Does Not Light Up ............213
7.5.5.4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . . .213
7.6 Combo Charger.............................213
7.6.1 Installation ............................213
7.6.2 Operator Controls .........................214
7.6.3 Using the Combo Charger With The 7535 ............214
7.6.4 7.2.4 Charging The Spare Battery ................214
7.6.5 Charge Indicators .........................215
7.6.6 Troubleshooting..........................215
7.7 Combo Dock...............................216
7.7.1 Installation ............................216
7.7.2 Using The Combo Dock .....................216
7.7.3 Network Access..........................216
7.7.4 Troubleshooting..........................217
7.8 Quad Dock................................217
7.8.1 Installation ............................217
7.8.2 Indicators And Controls .....................218
7.8.3 Using The Quad Dock ......................218
7.8.4 Network Access..........................218
7.8.4.1 Network Addressing ..................218
7.8.5 Battery Charging .........................219
7.8.6 Troubleshooting..........................219
7.8.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful ..............219
7.8.6.2 7535 LED Does Not Light When Docked .......219
7.8.6.3 7535 Battery Does Not Charge When Docked.....219
7.9 Portable Docking Module (PDM) ....................219
7.10 Bluetooth Peripherals ..........................222
7.11 The 7535 Picker Cradle .........................222
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual ix
Contents
7.11.1 Mounting Recommendations ..................223
7.11.1.1 Mounting Template ..................223
7.11.2 Wiring Guidelines ........................224
7.11.3 Using The Picker Cradle .....................224
7.11.4 Maintaining The Picker Cradle .................224
7.11.5 The Powered Cradle Option ...................225
7.11.5.1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle .........225
7.11.6 The Port Replicator........................226
Chapter 8: Specifications
8.1 7535 Hand-Held Computer Specifications...............229
8.2 Radio Specifications...........................230
8.3 Bar Code Scanning ...........................230
8.3.1 Internal Scanners .........................231
8.3.2 Internal Scanner Port .......................231
8.3.3 External Scanners ........................231
8.4 Internal Scanner Specifications.....................231
8.4.1 SE1200 High Performance & Long Range Specs ........232
8.4.2 SE1223 Advanced Long Range & SE2223 2-D Specs .....233
8.4.3 Symagery SX4000 & Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager Specs . . . 234
8.5 External Scanner Specifications.....................236
8.5.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs ......236
8.5.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs ..........238
8.6 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack ........................240
Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices
A.1 Support Services.............................A-1
A.1.1 Canada and USA: Technical Support and Repair Services . . . A-1
A.1.2 International Support ......................A-1
Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams
B.1 7535 Tether Port Pinout .........................B-1
B.2 Docking Port & Battery Connector - TBD ...............B-1
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual xi
APPROVALS AND SAFETY SUMMARY
Declaration Of Conformity
Product: 7535 Hand Held Micro-computer
Application of Council EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC
Directive(s): Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC
Conformity Declared EN 301 489-17: v1.1.1; 09-2000
to Standards: EN 50082-1:1997; EN 50082-2:1995;
EN 55022:1994, Class B;
EN 61000-3-2; EN 61000-3-3
EN 55024:1998;
EN 61000-4-2; ±4kV CD; ±8kV AD
EN 61000-4-3; 3V/m, 80-1000 MHz
EN 61000-4-4; ±0.5kV on I/O lines, ±1kV Power lines
EN 61000-4-5; ±2kV Common; ±1kV Differential mode
EN 61000-4-6; 3VRMS, 150kHz-80MHz
EN 61000-4-11; AC Mains Ports
EN 60950: 1992 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 +A11
Manufacturer: PSION TEKLOGIX INC.
2100 Meadowvale Boulevard
Mississauga, Ontario, Canada
L5N 7J9
Year of Manufacture: 2003
Manufacturer’s Address PSION TEKLOGIX S.A.
in the European La Duranne; 135 Rue Rene Descartes; BP 421000
Community: 13591 Aix-En-Provence
Cedex 3; France
Type of Equipment: Information Technology Equipment
Equipment Class: Commercial and Light Industrial
I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to
the above directives and standards.
Manufacturer: Rob Williams
Vice President of Engineering
Psion Teklogix Inc. Ontario
Legal Representative Domique Binckly
Vice President International Sales
Psion Teklogix S.A. France
Approvals And Safety Summary
xii Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
This equipment complies with Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Psion Teklogix, the party
responsible for compliance, may void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE
Operating Psion Teklogix equipment where explosive gas is present may
result in an explosion.
DO NOT REMOVE COVERS OR OPEN ENCLOSURES
To avoid injury, the equipment covers and enclosures should only be
removed by qualified service personnel. Do not operate the equipment
without the covers and enclosures properly installed.
CAUTION!
Danger of explosion if a 7535 battery is incorrectly handled, charged,
disposed of or replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to
the instructions described in “Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions” on
page 208. Carefully review all battery safety issues.
VORSICHT!
Explosiongefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur
durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen
Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 1
INTRODUCTION 1
1
1.1 About This Manual ..............................3
1.2 Text Conventions ...............................4
1.3 About The 7535 Hand-Held Computer ....................5
1.3.1 Features .................................5
1.3.2 The 7535 Hand-Held Computer .....................7
1.3.3 The 7535 Hand-Held Safety Labels ...................9
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 3
Chapter 1: Introduction
About This Manual
1.1 About This Manual
This manual describes how to configure, operate and maintain the Psion Teklogix
7535 hand-held computer.
Chapter 1: Introduction
provides a basic overview of the 7535 hand-held.
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
describes the steps required to get the 7535 ready for operation.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
describes the 7535 features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery.
This chapter also provides a description of the keyboard, how to navigate in
Microsoft® Windows® CE, how to use the internal scanner, and so on.
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
describes the Microsoft® Windows® CE desktop and how to use it. This
chapter also outlines the basics of moving around a Windows CE window,
selecting and opening icons, files, folders and working with a Windows
dialogue box.
Chapter 5: Configuration
provides a description of the Windows CE Control Panel and how to use it
to configure the 7535, along with the scanners attached to the hand-held,
and so on.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
describes TESS and ANSI operations. This chapter also provides descriptions of
the Tekterm parameters.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
describes the peripherals and accessories available for your 7535 hand-held.
Chapter 8: Specifications
details radio, hand-held computer and battery specifications.
Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices
provides the helpdesk phone number at the Mississauga, Ontario, Canada office
and details the support services available. This appendix also lists the world-
wide office addresses and phone numbers.
Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams
includes pinouts and diagrams of the ports and cables.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Text Conventions
4Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
1.2 Text Conventions
Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.
Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions
or additional information that is critical to the operation of
the equipment.
Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent
physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 5
Chapter 1: Introduction
About The 7535 Hand-Held Computer
1.3 About The 7535 Hand-Held Computer
The 7535 is a ruggedized hand-held personal computer, running the Microsoft®
Windows® CE.net operating system. It is intended for use in commercial and light
industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. All
possible bar code input methodologies are supported by one of the variety of
scanners available. Optimization for specific operational environments is supported
with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories.
1.3.1 Features
• Rugged design:
- sealed from water and dust to IP54 (light rain) rating.
- withstands multiple drops of up to 6.5 feet onto concrete.
• Large 240 x 320 portrait mode display that is available in colour or black
and white with or without a touchscreen
• Automatic backlighting for both the display and the keypad.
- automatic backlight and contrast control.
- daylight readable screen.
• Processor and memory:
- Intel PXA255 400Mhz CPU with 32 MB FLASH and 64 MB RAM
standard.
• Microsoft® Windows® CE.net operating system
• Application software:
- Internet Explorer 5.5 for CE.
- Tekterm terminal emulation.
• Ergonomic keyboard designed to accommodate left- and right-handed use.
• Two keyboard formats available:
- 58-key with 6 function keys (standard).
- 36-key large button with 10 function keys.
- keypads feature EL backlight for visibility in low-light conditions.
• Wireless communication:
- Compact FLASH slot normally equipped with an IEEE 802.11b
11 Mbps 2.4GHz Wi-Fi radio.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Features
6Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
- standard antenna integrated onto radio card.
- optional high performance internal antenna available.
- Bluetooth SD I/O radio.
• Expansion slot:
- SD I/O slot that supports extra FLASH memory (up to 512 MB) or a
Bluetooth radio.
• Programming environment:
-HTML
- .net Compact framework
- Java, Visual C++
• Bar code applications:
- internal 1D and 2D scan engines.
- internal CMOS image capture scan engine.
- supports decoded and undecoded tethered scanners.
• RFID applications:
- internal dual laser scanner/RFID engine.
- external tethered RFID reader.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 7
Chapter 1: Introduction
The 7535 Hand-Held Computer
1.3.2 The 7535 Hand-Held Computer
Figure 1.1 7535 With 58-Key Keyboard
Chapter 1: Introduction
The 7535 Hand-Held Computer
8Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure 1.2 7535 Docking Port
Figure 1.3 Tether Port
Figure 1.4 Scanner Window
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 9
Chapter 1: Introduction
The 7535 Hand-Held Safety Labels
1.3.3 The 7535 Hand-Held Safety Labels
Figure 1.5 Laser Warning Labels
Figure 1.6 Radio Labels
Chapter 1: Introduction
The 7535 Hand-Held Safety Labels
10 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure 1.7 Manufacturer’s Label
Warning: Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 11
UNPACKING & BASIC CHECKOUT 2
2
2.1 Preparing The 7535 For Operation .....................13
2.1.1 Equipment You Need To Get Started .................13
2.1.2 Charging The Battery .........................13
2.1.3 Attaching Carrying Accessories ...................13
2.1.3.1 Attaching The Hand Strap ..................14
2.1.3.2 Attaching The Pistol Grip ..................15
2.2 Powering Up The 7535 And Configuring The Radio ............16
2.2.1 Installing The Battery And Switching The 7535 On .........17
2.2.2 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio .................18
2.3 Advanced NETWLAN Settings ....................22
2.3.1 Preferred Networks ......................23
2.3.2 Advanced Network Access ..................23
2.3.3 Configuring WEP Keys ........................24
2.5 Checking The Scanner ...........................29
2.6 Uploading New Applications ........................29
2.8 Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held .......................30
2.7 Calibrating The Touchscreen ........................30
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 13
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Preparing The 7535 For Operation
2.1 Preparing The 7535 For Operation
Typically, 7535 hand-helds are configured at the factory and arrive ready for use.
Although the 7535 is equipped with an internal Compact Flash and SD I/O slot,
these slots are not intended for user modification. If a device needs to be changed or
added in these slots, contact qualified Psion Teklogix personnel. Refer to
Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices for the service number
closest to you.
2.1.1 Equipment You Need To Get Started
You’ll need:
• A 7535 compatible battery charger, docking station or portable docking
module (PDM) with power supply.
• An operating wireless network (if you are not operating the equipment in
batch mode).
• A medium Phillips head screwdriver.
2.1.2 Charging The Battery
Important: The 7535 uses a high capacity Lithium-Ion battery. It is critical
that you review the battery safety guidelines in “Lithium-Ion
Battery Safety Precautions” on page 208 before charging the
battery.
Batteries shipped from the factory are not charged. They must be fully charged prior
to use. Full capacity may not be reached until at least 5 full charge/discharge cycles
have been performed.
7535 batteries can be charged using a gang charger or the 7535 internal charger.
When using the internal charger, a suitable power source is required. All chargers
and docking stations are described in Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
beginning on page 210.
2.1.3 Attaching Carrying Accessories
Psion Teklogix recommends that a carrying accessory – a hand strap, pistol grip or
shoulder strap – be installed on the 7535 before use.
If your hand-held is not fitted with a hand strap or pistol grip, you can install either
using the carrying accessory kit supplied. You’ll need:
• A Phillips head screwdriver.
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Attaching The Hand Strap
14 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Important: Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure the screws on the
carrying accessories. These chemicals may damage the plastic
casing.
2.1.3.1 Attaching The Hand Strap
Note: A Phillips head screwdriver is required.
Psion Teklogix recommends that the hand strap provided with your 7535 always be
used. However, if your unit has an internal scanner and you plan to use the pistol
grip accessory, a hand strap is not required.
Two Phillips head screws are provided with the hand strap.
• Attach the strap to the two threaded inserts located at the back of the 7535
near the top of the unit.
Figure 2.1 Attaching The Hand Strap
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 15
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Attaching The Pistol Grip
• Stretch the handstrap toward the base of the 7535, and hook the bottom of
the handstrap into the slot near the base of the battery pack.
Figure 2.2 Hooking The Hand Strap To The 7535
2.1.3.2 Attaching The Pistol Grip
Note: A Phillips head screwdriver is required.
The pistol grip is attached to the back of the 7535 using the four threaded inserts in
the upper part of the 7535 casing. Four black #4-40 Phillips head screws are
provided with this accessory.
Note: Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism is securely
snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly.
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Powering Up The 7535 And Configuring The Radio
16 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and
the inserts on the back of the 7535 align with the holes in the pistol grip.
Figure 2.3 Attaching The Pistol Grip
• Using a Phillips screwdriver, securely fasten the pistol grip to the back of
the 7535.
2.2 Powering Up The 7535 And Configuring The Radio
Note: Psion Teklogix offers a Portable Docking Module (PDM) along with its
power supply to help speed the checkout and confirmation process for
your 7535. The PDM can power your hand-held with or without a battery
installed in the 7535. Refer to Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accesso-
ries beginning on page 205 for more information about this accessory.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 17
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Installing The Battery And Switching The 7535 On
2.2.1 Installing The Battery And Switching The 7535 On
If you are not using a docking station or PDM:
• Slide the charged battery with the moulded plastic facing you into the 7535.
Click the battery into place.
Figure 2.4 Installing The Battery
Note: If you are using a docking station, you can insert an uncharged battery,
dock the unit and switch it on.
If you are using a PDM, you can configure your unit without a battery, with
acharged battery or with an uncharged battery.
If you are using a hand strap:
• Hook the bottom of the hand strap into the slot at the base of the battery.
To switch the 7535 on:
• Press and hold down the <ENTER/ON> or the <SCAN> key for at least
one second.
• When all four LEDs flash orange, release the <ENTER/ON> button.
A splash screen displaying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Microsoft®
Windows® CE. net logo appears. When Windows® CE has successfully loaded, the
startup desktop is displayed.
Note: The screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading
bar reaches the end. This is part of the normal Windows CE cold boot
process. The desktop is displayed after a few moments.
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
18 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
2.2.2 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
The most common 802.11b settings are configured as defaults. However, there are
some fields that must be completed, including the ESSID of your access point and
the security methods implemented in the network (including access keys). At
various stages during network setup, you can tap on the taskbar radio icon to view
detailed statistics such as the access point you are connected to, the radio strength,
and so on.
Important: If the 7535 is equipped with a radio and it has never been config-
ured, the radio settings dialogue box opens automatically when
the unit is powered on. Follow the directions beginning at Step 4
on page 19 to configure the radio.
After the initial configuration, you must follow the directions
beginning at Step 1 below to open the Control Panel and display
the radio settings dialogue box.
To configure the 802.11b radio:
1. Open the Control Panel. If you have a touchscreen, tap on the Control Panel
icon on the desktop. If you’re using a keyboard, press <BLUE> <0>
and choose Control Panel from the System Menu.
2. Open the Network and Dial-up Connections applet.
Figure 2.5 Network And Dial-Up Connections
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 19
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
3. Choose the NETWLAN1 icon to open the 802.11b Wireless LAN Settings window.
Figure 2.6 802.11b Wireless LAN Settings Window
4. IP Address
In the IP Address tab, ‘Obtain an IP address via DHCP’ is selected by default.
This is the most common configuration. If you prefer, choose ‘Specify an
IP address’, and enter a static IP address.
Figure 2.7 IP Address Assignment
Note: If you enter a static IP Address, press <TAB> to switch between the
address entry fields. Use the <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys to
position the cursor in an IP address field. (If you do not have a static
IP Address allocated to you, contact your System Administrator.)
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
20 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5. Wireless Networks
First, make certain that the check box next to ‘Use Windows to configure
network setting’ is enabled (√) so that the items you configure in this
window are activated. If this option is not enabled, press <TAB> to
highlight the check box, and press <SPACE> to enable it.
Figure 2.8 Radio Settings
6. ESSID (Extended Service Set Identifier)
Press the <TAB> key again to highlight the ‘Available networks...’ list, and
choose an access point that is broadcasting its ESSID. Since access
points are generally secure, they will most likely not be listed here;
you’ll need to define the access point to which your 7535 will connect.
Press the <TAB> key until the <Add...> button is highlighted. Press
<ENTER> to open the Wireless Network Properties dialogue box.
Type the appropriate ESSID (Extended Service Set Identifier) in the Network
name text entry field at the top of this dialogue box.
Figure 2.9 Wireless Network Properties
List of networks
broadcasting ESSID
Preferred networks
Type your access point’s
ESSID here.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 21
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
The Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters. The name
assigned here is listed in the preferred network list labelled ‘Automatically
connect to these networks:’ (see Figure 2.8 on page 20).
Note: Keep in mind that the 7535 will only communicate with access points that
are configured with the same ESSID.
7. Ad Hoc And Infrastructure
If you are using an “Infrastructure” network – one in which 7535s must
pass data through an access point – leave the checkbox next to ‘This is an
ad hoc network’ blank.
If you are using an “Ad Hoc” network – a network in which 7535s pass data
directly to other 7535s without an access point – press the <TAB> key to
highlight‘This is an ad hoc network’, and press the <SPACE> key to enable (√)
the Ad Hoc check box.
8. Saving The Configurations
In the Wireless Network Properties dialogue box, press the <TAB> key until
the <OK> button is highlighted. Press <ENTER> to save the configura-
tions.
9. Once the NETWLAN Settings dialogue box (Figure 2.8 on page 20) is dis-
played, you need to save all your radio configurations. Press <TAB>
to highlight the Wireless Networks tab, and press <ENTER> to save the
configuration.
10. Reviewing The Configurations
To determine if the radio configuration has been successfully saved, in
the Network and Dial-up Connections window (see Figure 2.6 on page 19),
choose the NETWLAN1 icon to redisplay the 802.11b Wireless LAN Settings
window. Review the contents under each tab in the window to make
certain that your settings have been saved. To be sure that the unit is
communicating with an access point, check that the radio strength
meter in the taskbar is active.
To determine if you have successfully connected to the access point
network and have received an IP Address from the DHCP server, open the
NETWLAN1 status window from the System Tray in the taskbar.
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Advanced NETWLAN Settings
22 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Press <BLUE><0> and choose System Tray from the System Menu. Use the
<LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys to highlight the radio strength meter
and then, press <ENTER>. The NETWLAN1 statistics window is displayed.
Check that the “Network Name” field displays the one you specified.
Choose the <More...> button with the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to
launch the NETWLAN1 status window. Choose the IP Information tab to determine
the unit IP Address. If you prefer, you can determine the unit IP Address
from the MS DOS command prompt located in the Windows folder in the
Explorer application. Type “ipconfig” in the command line to display your
IP Address.
2.3 Advanced NETWLAN Settings
This section describes a few additional options in the NETWLAN Settings dialogue box.
Keep in mind that these options are not necessary for radio configuration. All the
steps necessary for your radio to communicate with your network are detailed in
“Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio” beginning on page 18.
Figure 2.10 Radio Settings
Preferred Networks Move up &
Move down Buttons
Advanced
Button
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 23
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Preferred Networks
2.3.1 Preferred Networks
Each network that you configure is listed in the preferred networks list under
‘Automatically connect to these networks’. These are the preferred networks that the 7535
attempts to connect with in sequence, beginning at the top of the list. If you need to
rearrange this list of networks – move networks up and down in the list:
• Press the <TAB> key to highlight the preferred networks list.
• Use the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow keys to highlight the network in the
preferred list that you want to move up or down.
• To move the highlighted item in the list upward or downward, press <TAB>
to highlight the <Move up> or <Move down> button.
• Press <ENTER> to move the item up or down in the preferred network list.
2.3.2 Advanced Network Access
If you have configured more than one network, the <Advance> button in the NETWLAN
Settings dialogue box (Figure 2.10 on page 22) is used to specify the type of network
your 7535 can access.
To access the Advance dialogue box:
1. Press the <TAB> key to highlight the <Advance> button, and press
<ENTER>.
Figure 2.11 Advanced Network Settings
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Configuring WEP Keys
24 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
These options specify the type of network connection your 7535 will choose
from the preferred network list labelled ‘Automatically connect to these networks:’
(see Figure 2.10 on page 22).
‘Any available network (AP preferred)’ – connect to an infrastructure network or an
ad hoc network listed in the preferred network list.
‘Access point (infrastructure) only’ – connect to an infrastructure network listed in
the preferred network list.
‘Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) only’ – connect to an ad hoc (peer-to-peer) network
listed in the preferred network list.
‘Automatically connect to non-preferred networks’ – connect to an infrastructure
network not listed in the preferred network connection list.
2. When you’ve made your selections, press <TAB> to highlight the
<Close> button, and press <ENTER>.
2.3.3 Configuring WEP Keys
To set up WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption to prevent others from
accidentally accessing your network, follow the steps in this section.
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Open the Network and Dial-up Connections applet.
Figure 2.12 Network And Dial-Up Connections
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 25
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Configuring WEP Keys
3. Choose the NETWLAN1 icon to open the 802.11b Wireless LAN Settings window.
Figure 2.13 802.11b Wireless LAN Settings Window
Figure 2.14 Radio Settings
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Configuring WEP Keys
26 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
4. Display the options under the Wireless Network tab. If it’s not displayed, use
the <TAB> key to highlight the left-most tab in the NETWLAN Settings dia-
logue box – IP Address. Press the <RIGHT> arrow key to display the
options under the Wireless Network tab.
Figure 2.15 Wireless Networks Tab
5. Press the <TAB> key to highlight the <Add..> button, and press
<ENTER> to display the Wireless Network Properties dialogue box.
Figure 2.16 Wireless Network Properties
Preferred Networks
√
Modify WEP Ke
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 27
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Configuring WEP Keys
Important: To add or modify a WEP Key in an EXISTING network:
• In the ‘preferred network’ list (see Figure 2.15 on page 26),
highlight the network in which you want to add or modify a
WEP key, and then
• RATHER THAN SELECTING THE <Add...> BUTTON,
select the <Properties> button.
6. Press <TAB> until ‘Data encryption (WEP enabled)’ is highlighted. Press the
<SPACE> key to enable (√) this option.
7. To define your own WEP keys, press the <TAB> key to highlight
‘The key is provided automatically’. Press <SPACE> to deselect the checkbox.
8. Press the <TAB> key to highlight the <Modify WEP Keys...> button,
and press <ENTER>.
Figure 2.17 WEP Key Settings
9. Press the <TAB> key to move from field to field in this dialogue box.
Network key: Used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equiv-
alent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key
on the access point.
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Additional Radio Security Options
28 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Key format: Defines the format WEP keys used – either ASCII alphanumeric
characters or Hexadecimal digits. For example, if the access point has an
active key of bobby, the 7535 Key format would be set to ‘ASCII characters’
and the Network key would be defined as bobby.
Key length: Defines the length of the keys as either 104 bits/13 characters or
40 bits/5 characters. (Intel radios support both these lengths. Other radios
may be restricted.)
Key Index (advanced): Identifies the WEP key. Up to 4 keys can be indexed.
Keep in mind that Key Index numbering for Windows CE starts at 0 (zero), so
if an access point and a hand-held have been assigned a Transmit Key of 1,
Windows CE will match that with Key Index 0 (zero). If an access point and a
hand-held have been assigned a Transmit Key of 4, Windows CE will
match that with Key Index 3, and so on.
10. Press <TAB> to highlight the <OK> button, and press <ENTER>.
2.4 Additional Radio Security Options
Additional security options can be set through the Wireless Network Properties dialogue
box.
Figure 2.18 Network Authentication, EAP and 802.1X
Network Authentication (Shared Mode)
If ‘Network Authentication’ is enabled (√), the access point sends a known unen-
crypted challenge packet to the 7535 radio which encrypts the packet and
sends it back to the access point. The access point attempts to decrypt the
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 29
Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout
Checking The Scanner
encrypted packet and forwards an authentication response packet back to
the 7535 radio, indicating the success or failure of the decryption. If the
packet is successfully encrypted/decrypted, the user is authenticated.
If this option is disabled (the default setting), network authentication is
not used.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) and Enable 802.1x
“802.1x” is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area
networks. It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet
network, whether wired or wireless. A packet encapsulated in an “EAP” is
used in conjunction with the “802.1x” standard to authenticate users at the
MAC layer.
Available EAPs are listed in the dropdown menu next to the ‘EAP’ option.
To enable “802.1x”, press <TAB> to highlight ‘Enable 802.1x’, and press the
<SPACE> key to enable (√) it.
2.5 Checking The Scanner
If your 7535 is equipped with an internal scanner, it will successfully decode most
1D bar codes as delivered. Press the SCAN button and check for a valid decode on
any UPC bar code. If desired, set the “Dot Time” parameter to zero in the ‘Teklogix
Scanners’ applet in the Control Panel to turn off the default aiming dot.
Performance is improved if you disable all unneeded bar codes under the ‘Bar
Codes’ dialogue screen. Review “Scanner Properties” on page 86 for details about
bar codes.
2.6 Uploading New Applications
The simplest way to upload Windows CE.net applications into the 7535 is to use a
PDM with a USB equipped PC. Refer to “Portable Docking Module (PDM)” on
page 219 for more details about the PDM.
• Attach the supplied USB cable between the host port on your PC and the
PDM ‘device’ port.
• Install the PDM on the 7535 and turn it on.
Once WinCE is booted, the PC should indicate it has found a new USB storage
device. (You will need the Windows 2000 operating system or later).
[Final details TBD]
To upload an application:
• Drag the file onto the USB device folder.
• Shut down the USB device on the PC before disconnecting the 7535.
• Perform a cold reboot of the 7535 – hold down the <ENTER> and
<BLUE> keys for at least a second.
2.7 Calibrating The Touchscreen
If your 7535 is equipped with a touchscreen, it will need to be calibrated. Refer to
“Calibrating The Touchscreen” on page 44 for details.
2.8 Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held
Note: You do not need to reset your 7535 after configuring the radio.
To reset the 7535:
• Press and hold down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key simulta-
neously for a minimum of six seconds.
A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit. All RAM memory contents are lost.
The contents of the flash memory and memory card are preserved.When the 7535 is
reset, the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft® Windows® CE.net
splash screen before displaying the startup desktop.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 31
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR 7535 3
3
3.1 Features Of The 7535 ............................33
3.2 The Battery .................................34
3.2.1 Battery Safety.............................34
3.2.2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack .............34
3.2.3 Charging The Battery .........................35
3.3 Switching The 7535 Hand-Held On And Off ................36
3.4 The Keyboard ................................37
3.4.1 Modifier Keys.............................38
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys..................39
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys...................39
3.4.2 The Keys ...............................39
3.4.3 The 58-Key Keyboard ........................40
3.4.4 The 36-Key Keyboard ........................40
3.4.5 The Keypad Backlight ........................42
3.5 The Display .................................43
3.5.1 Adjusting The Display Backlight ...................43
3.5.2 Adjusting The Contrast On Monochrome Displays .........43
3.5.3 Calibrating The Touchscreen .....................44
3.6 7535 Hand-Held Computer Indicators ...................45
3.6.1 LEDs .................................45
3.6.1.1 Charge LEDs.........................46
3.6.1.2 Radio Traffic LEDs.....................46
3.6.1.3 Scan LEDs ..........................47
3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators..........................47
3.6.3 Audio Indicators ...........................49
3.6.3.1 Adjusting The Beeper Volume ................49
3.7 Internal Scanners ..............................50
3.7.1 Warnings ...............................51
3.7.2 Scanning Techniques .........................51
3.7.3 Scan LED Indicators .........................52
3.7.4 Troubleshooting............................52
3.7.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners......53
3.7.6 Operating Internal PDF Laser Scanners ...............53
3.7.7 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imager Scanners.....53
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
32 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
3.8 Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals .............54
3.9 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time ............55
3.10 Monitoring The Network Connection ...................57
3.11 Uploading Data In A Docking Station ...................57
3.12 General Maintenance............................58
3.12.1 Caring For The Touchscreen.....................58
3.12.2 Cleaning The 7535..........................58
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 33
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Features Of The 7535
3.1 Features Of The 7535
Figure 3.1 Front Of 7535
Figure 3.2 Back Of 7535
Ambient Light Sensor
Tether Port
Docking Port
7535 Screen
Stylus
(Pointing Tool)
Scanner Window
Battery Pack
Tether Port
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
The Battery
34 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
3.2 The Battery
The 7535 hand-held operates with a Lithium-Ion battery pack. Preparing the
hand-held unit for operation requires that a battery pack be charged and installed in
the unit.
3.2.1 Battery Safety
Important: Before attempting to install, use or charge the battery pack, it is
critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines
in the section entitled “Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions”
beginning on page 208.
3.2.2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack
Note: TURN OFF THE 7535 HAND-HELD BEFORE REMOVING THE
BATTERY PACK. If you do not turn the hand-held off before removing
the battery, it may be necessary to reboot the unit. Any active sessions
will be lost.
Removing The Battery Pack
• If your 7535 is equipped with a hand strap, unhook it from the base of the
battery.
• Press down the release tab at the top of the battery, and slide the battery out.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 35
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Charging The Battery
Installing The Battery Pack
To install the battery pack:
• Slide the battery pack with the moulded plastic facing you into the 7535.
Click the battery into place.
Figure 3.3 Installing The Battery Pack
• If your computer is equipped with a hand strap, insert the hook at the end of
the hand strap into the slot at the base of the battery.
3.2.3 Charging The Battery
Important: FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about 7535 chargers and
docking stations, refer to Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Acces-
sories beginning on page 205.
All batteries must be charged before use. The 7535 battery can be charged with a
variety of chargers. These include:
• 6-Gang Charger (Model #HU3006) – charges up to six Lithium-Ion batter-
ies at one time.
• Portable Docking Module (PN 1030085) – charges the 7535 battery (with
the battery installed in the unit).
• Combo Charger (Model #HU3002) – a desktop charger that charges the
7535 internal battery along with a spare battery pack.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Switching The 7535 Hand-Held On And Off
36 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• Combo Docking Station (Model #HU4002) – operates as both a charger
and a docking station. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in
the computer and a spare battery can be charged simultaneously. When used
as a docking station, it provides connectivity (10/100 BaseT Ethernet inter-
face) to a host Ethernet network, primarily for batch data file transfers.
• Quad Docking Station (Model #HU4004) – can charge the battery of up to
four 7535s inserted in the docking station while transferring data through an
Ethernet connection.
• Powered Cradle – can charge the 7535 with the battery installed in the
hand-held.
It can take from 1.5 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The 7535’s intelligent charging
system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process
when the battery is at maximum capacity.
Note: Refer to “Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time” on page 55
for additional information about the 7535 battery.
Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge
process until the battery temperature is between 0˚C (32˚F) and
39˚C (102˚F). If the battery is too hot or cold, the battery status
LED flashes yellow and the charge is suspended. Refer to
Table 3.1, “Charge LEDs” on page 46 for details.
3.3 Switching The 7535 Hand-Held On And Off
Switching On The 7535
• Press and hold down the <ENTER/ON> key for at least one second.
• When all four LEDs flash orange, release the <ENTER/ON> button.
A splash screen displaying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Microsoft®
Windows® CE. net logo appears followed by the startup desktop.
Note: If the 7535 is in suspend state, pressing any key ‘wakes’ the unit from this
state. The screen in which you were working before the computer entered
suspend state is displayed.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 37
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
The Keyboard
Switching Off The 7535
Important: Keep in mind that turning off the 7535 does not result in a
complete reboot; rather, the unit enters a power-saving,
“suspend” state. When the 7535 is turned on from suspend state,
operation resumes within a few seconds.
To switch off the 7535:
• Press the <BLUE> key, and then press the <ENTER/ON> key.
Important: If the word ‘BLUE’ is displayed in uppercase in the taskbar area
at the bottom of the screen, this key is locked “on” – the 7535 will
not switch off. Press the <BLUE> key again to unlock it; then
press <BLUE> <ENTER/ON> to switch the 7535 off.
3.4 The Keyboard
The 7535 offers two types of keyboard layouts – a 58-key keyboard and a 36-key,
large button keyboard. Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a
desktop computer. Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC
keyboard, the differences are noted.
The <BLUE> and <ORANGE> modifier keys provide access to additional keys and
system functions. These functions are colour coded in orange and blue print above
the keyboard keys.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Modifier Keys
38 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure 3.4 58-Key And 36-Key Keyboard Layouts
3.4.1 Modifier Keys
The <SHIFT>, <CTRL>, <ALT>, <BLUE> and <ORANGE> keys are modifier
keys. Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed. For
example, on a 58-key keyboard, a square bracket is printed in orange print above the
<4> key. Pressing the <ORANGE> key followed by the <4> key displays a square
bracket rather than the number 4.
The <SHIFT>, <CTRL> and <ALT> keys operate much like a desktop keyboard
except that they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier
key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.
F11 F12 F13 F14
ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
PQRS TUV WXYZ
SPACE __
__
_
_
F15 F16 F17
F19
F18
F20M3 M4
E
S
C
O
F
F
DEL
F1 F2 F3 F4
CTRL TAB
1!
4$
2@3#
5%6^
7&8*9(
.'0)SHIFT ALT
BKSP
F5 F6 F7 F8
F9 M1 M2 F10
MENU
+-
M5 M6
E
N
T
E
R
O
N
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 39
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Activating Modifier Keys
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys
When a modifier key is pressed once, it is displayed in lowercase letters in the
taskbar at the bottom of the 7535 screen. For example, if the <CTRL> key is
pressed, ctrl key is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen. Once the next key is
pressed, the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar.
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys
When a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked’ on. A ‘locked’ modifier key is
displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar. For example, pressing the <BLUE> key
twice locks it on – it is displayed as BLUE KEY in the taskbar at the bottom of the
computer screen.
The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock
or turn it off. Once a modifier key is unlocked (pressed a third time), the uppercase
representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed.
3.4.2 The Keys
The <SHIFT> Key
The <SHIFT> key is used to display uppercase alpha characters. A ‘locked’
<SHIFT> key (pressed twice) operates like the <CAPS LOCK> key on a desktop
keyboard.
The Arrow Keys
The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow –
up, down, left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that
indicates where the next character you type will appear.
The <BKSP/DEL> Key
The <BKSP> key (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves the
cursor one character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke.
The <DEL> key (<BLUE> <BKSP>) erases the character at the cursor position.
The <CTRL> And <ALT> Key
The <CTRL> and <ALT> keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are
application dependent.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
The 58-Key Keyboard
40 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
The <TAB> Key
Typically, the <TAB> key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or
downward.
The <ESC> Key
Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu,
dialogue box or activity and return to the previous one.
The <SPACE> Key
Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialogue
box, pressing the <SPACE> key enables (√) or disables a checkbox.
The <SCAN> Key
Pressing the <SCAN> key – the yellow key with the star-burst scan symbol on it –
activates the scanner beam while pressed. For units that do not have internal
scanners, this key is either inoperable or can be remapped to another key function
(such as an <ENTER> key).
3.4.3 The 58-Key Keyboard
In addition to alphanumeric keys that are directly accessible on the keyboard (no key
combination is required) and the keys described in this chapter, the 58-key keyboard
also provides function keys and macro keys. These keys are not used as part of the
Windows CE operating system. They can be custom defined for each application.
The Tekterm application utilizes these keys. Refer to “Additional Keyboard
Functions” on page 113 for details about Tekterm keys.
3.4.4 The 36-Key Keyboard
On 36-key 7535s, all alpha characters are printed on the unit plastic in orange
typeface above the numeric keys. To access an alpha character, you must first press
the <ORANGE> key and then press the numeric key above which the alpha
character you want to type is printed.
Because the alpha keys on a 36-key keyboard are laid out much like the letters on a
telephone – generally in groups of three letters per numeric key – you need to take a
few extra steps to access the alphabetic characters. The examples in this section help
illustrate how to access alpha characters.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 41
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
The 36-Key Keyboard
Choosing A Single Alpha Character
The examples below illustrate how to access A, B and C, all of which are printed in
orange characters above the numeric key, <2>.
To choose the letter ‘a’:
• Press the <ORANGE> key, and press the numeric key <2>.
To choose the letter ‘b’:
• Press the <ORANGE> key twice to lock it ‘on’, and press <2> twice.
• Press the <ORANGE> key again to unlock or turn it off.
To choose the letter ‘c’:
• Press the <ORANGE> key twice to lock it ‘on’.
• Press <2> three times, and then
• Press the <ORANGE> key again to unlock or turn it off.
Creating Uppercase Letters
To display a capital letter:
• Press the <ORANGE> key and then the <SHIFT> key before typing the
alpha character.
Choosing More Than One Alpha Character From The Same Key
If you need to choose more than one alpha character from a single key, you’ll need
to press the ‘Accept’ key between alpha selections. The ‘Accept’ key is presented as
an arrow ⇒ symbol above the ‘0’ (zero) key. Pressing this key signals the 7535 to
display the alpha character you’ve chosen and await the next selection from the
same key.
For example, suppose you want to type the letters ‘a’,‘b’ and ‘c’. These letters are
all accessible from the numeric key, <2>.
To type the letter ‘a’:
• Press the <ORANGE> key twice to lock it ‘on’, and then press the numeric
key, <2>.
• Press the ‘Accept’ key < ⇒> to indicate that the letter ‘a’ should be
accepted and that another letter from the same key will be chosen.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
The Keypad Backlight
42 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
To type the letter ‘b’:
• Press the <2> key twice.
• Press < ⇒> to accept the letter ‘b’.
To type the letter ‘c’:
• Press the <2> key three.
When you have completed your alpha selections from this key, you can do one of the
following:
• If you want to choose additional alpha characters from another key(s),
leave the <ORANGE> key ‘on’, and press the next numeric key that
supports the alpha character you require.
• If you do not want to choose any additional alpha characters, press
<ORANGE> again to unlock or turn ‘off’ the key and end alpha selection.
Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters From A Range Of Keys
If you plan on choosing alpha characters from a number of different keys, you are
not required to press the ‘Accept’ < ⇒> key after each alpha selection. The < ⇒>
key is only required when you are choosing more than one alpha character from the
same key – e.g., ‘a’, ‘b’ and ‘c’ from the <2> key.
Suppose you want to type the letters ‘a’,‘d’ and ‘g’. These alpha characters are
accessed from the numeric keys <2>, <3> and <4>.
• With the <ORANGE> key locked ‘on’ (press twice), press <2> to type the
letter ‘a’.
• Press <3> to type ‘d’, and press <4> to type the letter ‘g’.
• To end alpha selection, press the <ORANGE> key a third time to unlock it.
3.4.5 The Keypad Backlight
The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight
is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows CE Control Panel.
The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialogue box.
Refer to “Keyboard Backlight” on page 81 for details about this option.
Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 43
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
The Display
3.5 The Display
7535s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low
light conditions. The unit switches on when a key is pressed and the ambient light is
below the set threshold. A light sensor on the front of the hand-held determines the
ambient light level. On some displays, the contrast can also be adjusted to further
improve character visibility.
3.5.1 Adjusting The Display Backlight
The behaviour of the display backlight – the ambient light threshold below which
the backlight will become active and the intensity of the backlight – can be specified
in the Display Properties dialogue box in the Windows CE Control Panel.
Note: Refer to “Display Backlight” on page 77 for details about the Display
Properties dialogue box.
3.5.2 Adjusting The Contrast On Monochrome Displays
Note: In addition to the manual adjustments described in this section, the dis-
play contrast can also be adjusted using the Windows CE Control Panel.
Refer to “Display Contrast” on page 77 for details about this dialogue
box.
On monochrome displays only, the display contrast can be adjusted from the unit
keyboard using the <BLUE> key and function keys <F1> and <F2>.
To darken the display:
• Press the <BLUE> key, and then press <F1> . Repeat this key combi-
nation until the contrast suits your needs. To work more efficiently with
these keys, refer to the note below.
To lighten the display:
• Press the <BLUE> key, and then press <F2> . Repeat this key combi-
nation until the contrast suits your needs. To work more efficiently with
these keys, refer to the note below.
Note: To adjust the display contrast quickly, lock the <BLUE> key “on” by
pressing it twice. You can then press the <F1> and <F2> function keys
until you can easily read the contents of the screen.
When you have satisfactorily adjusted the contrast, press the <BLUE> key
a third time to unlock or turn it off.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Calibrating The Touchscreen
44 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
3.5.3 Calibrating The Touchscreen
If your 7535 touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus
pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, use the Stylus Properties dialogue box in
the Windows CE Control Panel to recalibrate the screen.
• In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window.
Figure 3.5 Stylus Icon
• Select the Calibration tab, and then choose the ‘Recalibrate’ button.
Figure 3.6 Calibration Screen
• Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 45
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
7535 Hand-Held Computer Indicators
3.6 7535 Hand-Held Computer Indicators
7535s use LEDs (Light Emitting Diode), onscreen messages and audio tones as
indicators.
3.6.1 LEDs
The 7535 is equipped with four tri-coloured LEDs. This section outlines what these
LEDs indicate.
Important: If an LED is illuminated in red, the operator should be cautious
as this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or
active laser emission.
Figure 3.7 Keyboard LEDs
Radio Traffic
Scanner
LED
LED Charge
LED
User
Application
LED
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Charge LEDs
46 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
3.6.1.1 Charge LEDs
The lower-right LED is reserved for internal charger/power status. This indicator is
active even when the 7535 is inserted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so
that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily.
*If the charge fails, refer to the charger troubleshooting sections in Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &
Accessories beginning on page 210 for helpful details.
Table 3.1 Charge LEDs
3.6.1.2 Radio Traffic LEDs
The upper-left LED on your 7535 flashes either orange or green to indicate when the
radio transmits and receives data.
Note: Keep in mind that while the standard 802.11b radio supports the trans-
mit/receive LED, not all radios support this function.
Table 3.2 Transmit and Receive LEDs
Function Charge LED Behaviour
External power not available. LED off.
Fully charged to within 95% of charge
capacity. LED displays solid green colour.
Quick charge successfully completed to
within 75% of charge capacity. LED flashes slow green.
Charge in progress. LED displays solid yellow colour.
Cell temperature out of range for charge. LED flashes yellow.
Unable to charge battery. LED displays solid red colour.
Charge circuit failure.* LED flashes fast red.*
Function Radio Traffic LED Behaviour
Radio Transmit LED flashes orange.
Radio Receive LED flashes green.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 47
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Scan LEDs
3.6.1.3 Scan LEDs
Successful scans are indicated in two ways – with a scan LED and with an
audio tone.
Table 3.3 Scan LED
3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators
The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators.
Figure 3.8 Taskbar
This display changes dynamically, and only those icons that are applicable are
displayed. For example, if a radio is not installed in your 7535, the radio signal icon
is not displayed in the taskbar.
Function Scan LED Behaviour
Scan in progress LED displays solid red during scan.
Successful scan LED displays solid green after decode.
Off when scan ended.
Unsuccessful scan LED flashes red.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Onscreen Indicators
48 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Modifier Key Indicators
<SHIFT>, <CTRL>, <ALT>, <BLUE> and <ORANGE> are modifier keys that
have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked. If a modifier key is
pressed once to activate it, the key is displayed in the taskbar in lowercase characters
– for example, pressing the <BLUE> key once displays blue key in the taskbar. If a
modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked on’ and the onscreen indicator is
displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar – for example, pressing <BLUE> twice
displays BLUE KEY in the taskbar.
Battery Gauge
The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides a visual indication of the
remaining battery power. The icon acts as a meter that is either full, at three-quarter
level, half, quarter level or empty.
When the battery level is low – approximately 15 minutes from empty – a warning
window pops up. When the battery power is completely depleted, a final warning
window indicates that the 7535 will be powered down.
Radio Signal Quality
Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon.
Tethered Devices
When a peripheral is attached to the tether port and activated, an associated icon
appears in the taskbar. The sample to the left indicates that a USB device is
connected to the tether port.
Full 75% 50% 25% Empty
Link Broken
100%
Scanner RFID Serial Device Scan-SeeUSB Device
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 49
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Audio Indicators
Docking Device
When a 7535 is inserted in a docking station, charger or cradle, an associated icon
appears in the taskbar.
Security Level
Security levels can be set to limit access to the Windows CE operating system. In
addition, applications can be restricted to prevent inadvertent changes.
3.6.3 Audio Indicators
The 7535 beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound
when a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, scan input is accepted or
rejected, an operator’s entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low.
3.6.3.1 Adjusting The Beeper Volume
The volume function keys located along the top of the keyboard are used to adjust
the beeper volume emitted from your 7535. The increase volume function key is
labelled with a plus sign . The decrease volume key is labelled with a minus
sign .
On 58-key keyboards, the volume function keys are accessed by pressing
<BLUE> <F5> and <F6>.
On 36-key keyboards, the volume function keys are accessed by pressing
<BLUE> < F3> and <F4>.
To increase the beeper volume:
• Press the <BLUE> key and then, the increase volume function key .
Repeat this key combination until the volume is sufficient for your needs.
To work more efficiently with these keys, refer to the note on page 50.
Gang Charger, Combo Charger
Combo Docking & Docking Station
Quad Docking Station Power Cradle Portable Docking
Module (PDM)
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Internal Scanners
50 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
To decrease the beeper volume:
• Press the <BLUE> key and then, press the decrease volume function
key . Repeat this key combination until the volume is low enough for
your needs. To work more efficiently with these keys, refer to the note
below.
Note: To adjust the beeper volume more quickly, lock the <BLUE> key “on” by
pressing it twice. You can then press the appropriate volume function keys
until the beeper volume suits your needs.
When you have satisfactorily adjusted the beeper volume, press the
<BLUE> key a third time to unlock or turn it off.
3.7 Internal Scanners
The scanner installed in your unit can be configured using the Scanner Properties
dialogue box in the Control Panel.
The 7535 can be equipped with a:
• One dimensional (1D) internal laser scanner,
• Internal PDF laser scanner, or a
• Two dimensional (2D) internal imager scanner.
It is critical that you review the warnings listed in Section 3.7.1 on page 51 before
using any of the scanners described in this chapter. “Scanning Techniques” on
page 51 outlines the mechanics of a successful scan. In addition, review “Scan LED
Indicators” on page 52 to better understand how to interpret whether or not a bar
code has been successfully scanned. Finally, “Troubleshooting” on page 52
provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 51
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Warnings
3.7.1 Warnings
For your own safety, it is critical that you comply with the following warnings:
1. Do not look into the laser beam or point the beam at people
or animals.
2. CAUTION – Using controls or adjustments, or performing
procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
3. CAUTION – The use of optical instruments with this product
will increase eye hazard.
4. This product contains a laser scanner that emits less than 1.0 mW
average radiant power at a wavelength of 650 or 680 nm. This
product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10, 1040.11 and DIN EN
60825: July 1993, and is classified as a Class 2 laser product. The
SE12xxALR has an average radiated power of 1.5 mW.
3.7.2 Scanning Techniques
Note: The scanning techniques described here apply to internal and external
scanners.
• Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code.
Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. In this position, light can
reflect back into the scanner’s exit window and prevent a successful decode.
• Scan the entire bar code. If you are using a 1D or 2D scanner, make certain
that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code, including
the margins on either end of the symbol.
If you are using a 2D imaging scanner, make certain the red, oval shaped
framing mark is centered within the bar code you want to scan.
• Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes.
• Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Scan LED Indicators
52 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
3.7.3 Scan LED Indicators
The 7535 scanner LED (the lower-left LED) indicates whether or not your scan is
successful. The LED behaves as follows:
• Scan In Progress: scan LED displays solid red colour.
• Successful Scan: scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when
the scan is ended.
• Unsuccessful scan: scan LED flashes red.
A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is
active, the onscreen message states – SCANNING. If the scan is successful, the bar
code data is displayed on the screen until the scan button (or pistol trigger) is
released.
3.7.4 Troubleshooting
If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:
• Is the 7535 on?
• Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the 7535
you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning proce-
dure or the bar code.
• Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different
bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code.
• Check that the bar code is within the proper range.
• Does the hand-held display the warning without scanning? This suggests a
hardware problem in the 7535.
• Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code?
• Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for
dirt or fogging.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 53
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners
3.7.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners
• Turn the 7535 on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
Important: If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the dot will
be enabled for a configurable time period (including off), after
which normal scanning begins. Refer to “Dot Time” on page 136
for details.
Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and
initiate an immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard
on long-range and high visibility internal scanners.
• Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a
warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six
seconds have elapsed.
3.7.6 Operating Internal PDF Laser Scanners
This scanner decodes PDF417 two-dimensional bar codes.
• Turn the 7535 on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
• Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. The beam expands
into a rectangle covering the bar code to properly scan it. The scan beam
and a warning indicator are visible until a successful decode is achieved or
three seconds have elapsed.
3.7.7 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imager Scanners
An imager scanner takes a snap shot of a single bar code or multiple bar codes (at
one time). It can find a bar code regardless of its orientation – that is, even a bar code
printed at a 45 degree angle to the 7535 will be decoded successfully.
Because imager scanners generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners,
some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of bar
codes being scanned. Although the imager includes illumination LEDs, ambient
light will help the imager decode the bar codes, especially if the bar code is far from
the 7535.
• Turn the 7535 computer on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
• Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals
54 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• When the scan button or trigger is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the
framing marker) is displayed. Centre the framing marker in the field – either
in the centre of the bar code you want to scan or in the centre of the area in
which multiple bar codes are to be scanned.
Illumination LEDs will flash and a picture of the bar code(s) is taken.
3.8 Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals
Tethered peripherals such as scanners and printers connect to the hand-held
computer with a quick release, circular connector. When a peripheral is connected to
the hand-held, the 7535 detects the peripheral and loads the necessary drivers for it.
An icon in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen provides a visual representation of
the peripheral and indicates that it is ready for operation.
To attach the peripheral to the round, tether port on the side of the 7535:
• Insert the barrel of the plug into the tether port and rotate slowly until
it clicks into place. The red dot on the port and on the connector should
be aligned.
Figure 3.9 Attaching The Cable To The Tether Port
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 55
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time
To remove the peripheral:
•Grasp the shell of the plug, and pull it back gently to unlock and release the
connector.
Figure 3.10 Disconnecting The Tether Cable
Important: Never attempt to disconnect a peripheral by pulling the connector
by the wire. The connector is locked into place and can only be
unlocked and removed by pulling back the plug shell.
3.9 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time
Under normal operating conditions, the battery lasts for a full 8-hour shift. As
Lithium-Ion batteries age, their capacity decreases gradually, and they are generally
considered depleted after approximately 2 years of use (less than 60% of original
capacity remaining). Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the 7535
at temperature extremes will shorten the battery life.
Lithium-Ion batteries do not require conditioning cycles and the 7535 battery
system (including chargers) requires no user interaction to maintain peak
performance.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time
56 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
To maximize the run time of your batteries, consider the following:
• The display backlight is the largest drain on the battery. Try to keep its
brightness as low as possible.
• The hand-held is ‘event’ driven – that is, when the unit is not in use, it
reverts to sleep mode (even when it appears to be running), saving battery
power. Events include a key press, touchscreen taps and scan triggers.
Power consumption is reduced if you avoid unnecessary events, and allow
the unit to sleep as much as possible.
• The 7535 battery is a ‘smart battery’ with built-in intelligence. The taskbar
battery icon is a linear gauge used to estimate the remaining run time of the
battery. It is important to note that the battery capacity icon displays quarter
percentages of nominal capacity (the capacity of a new battery). An aged
battery, even when fully charged, shows somewhat less capacity than
nominal.
Double-tapping on the battery icon displays a dialogue box that provides
detailed information about the battery status and performance. If the
remaining capacity indication seems inaccurate, the battery may need recal-
ibration. Recalibration requires that the battery be fully charged, discharged
and then charged again before use. If the battery is fully discharged and
charged on a regular basis, recalibration should not be necessary.
• When the hand-held is switched off, it goes into a low-power, suspend state
but continues to draw a small amount of power from the battery. This
should not be an issue unless the unit is left in suspend state for more than a
week – in this case, the battery should be removed.
• Batteries left for durations of more than one or two months should be fully
charged, discharged and then charged again before use. This recalibrates
the gas gauge and allows the internal electronics to determine the actual
capacity of the battery.
• The hand-held can determine when the useful life of the battery has expired
and will notify the user. Chargers may reject batteries that have exceeded
their lifespan.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 57
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
Monitoring The Network Connection
3.10 Monitoring The Network Connection
If your hand-held is equipped with a wireless LAN radio, it will typically associate
with the nearest access point. The radio signal quality meter in the taskbar indicates
the relative strength of the communication link.
To access the radio signal icon from the keyboard:
• Press <BLUE> <0> to display the System Menu.
• Choose System Tray from the menu.
• Use the <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys to highlight the radio signal
icon in the taskbar.
• Press <ENTER> to display the radio quality dialogue box.
If you have a touchscreen:
• Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the radio quality dialogue
box.
Note: Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on
a network session. At times, you may need to renew your connection by
logging in again.
3.11 Uploading Data In A Docking Station
The Combo Docking and Quad Docking peripherals allow the 7535 to link to an
Ethernet network. They are typically used to upload transaction data to a server
computer when a radio link in not available. When a 7535 is properly inserted in a
docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the taskbar at the bottom of the 7535
screen. The 7535 also detects the presence of the Ethernet network. Review the
documentation provided with the user application installed in your 7535 before
preforming data uploads.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535
General Maintenance
58 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
3.12 General Maintenance
3.12.1 Caring For The Touchscreen
The top of the touchscreen is a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a
conductive coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by
harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects
on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive
coating.
The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:
• mustard,
• sodium hydroxide,
• concentrated caustic solutions,
• benzyl alcohol, and
• concentrated miner acids.
If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable
screen protector (PN 1010029). These covers reduce the clarity of the display
slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they
become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced.
Note: If the environment is excessively harsh, consider using a tempered glass
version of the 7535.
3.12.2 Cleaning The 7535
Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild
detergent to wipe the unit clean.
•Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit.
• Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The
7535 has a plastic case that is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is
partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly
decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
• To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl
alcohol.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 59
WORKING WITH WINDOWS CE 4
4
4.1 Navigating In Windows CE And Applications ...............61
4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus ............61
4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard ...................61
4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs ................62
4.3 The Startup Desktop ............................63
4.3.1 Accessing Desktop Icons .......................63
4.3.2 The Taskbar ..............................64
4.3.2.1 Using The Taskbar ......................64
4.4 The System Menu ..............................65
4.5 Using A Dialogue Box ...........................68
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 61
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
Navigating In Windows CE And Applications
4.1 Navigating In Windows CE And Applications
Graphic user interfaces like Windows CE for portable devices and desktop Windows
(2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. An equivalent keyboard shortcut
is also available for every ‘point and click’ action.
Windows CE supports the same ‘point and click’ user interface and keyboard
shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference – the ‘point and click’ action is
accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse. Actions can be performed
using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping (provided your
7535 is equipped with a touchscreen).
4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus
Note: If the touch screen is not registering your screen taps accurately, the
touchscreen may need recalibration. Refer to “Calibrating The Touch-
screen” on page 44.
A touchscreen is an optional feature. A 7535 equipped with a touchscreen has a
stylus – a pointing tool that looks like a pen – stored in a slot at the top of the 7535.
The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen.
Note: To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only the stylus (pen)
supplied with your 7535.
To open a file, launch an applet or open a folder:
• Double-tap the stylus on the appropriate icon.
4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard
If your 7535 has a standard screen (rather than a touchscreen), choosing icons and
navigating dialogue boxes, displaying the desktop, and so on requires keyboard
input. If your unit has already been fully configured and your application is
launched at startup, you’ll have little need for keyboard navigation.
Refer to “Working With Files, Folders And Programs” on page 62 for additional
details keyboard navigation.
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
Working With Files, Folders And Programs
62 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, the 7535 does not support key
chording (pressing two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by
the next in sequence.
Table 4.1 Keyboard Navigation
4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs
Figure 4.1 Working With Windows Icons
• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon you want to open or launch.
• Press <ENTER>.
Note: Keep in mind that as with any Microsoft® Windows® program, you can
also highlight an icon, press <ALT> and type the letter <F> to open the
File menu. Then you can choose the Open command to open an icon.
Operation Key or Key Combination
Move the cursor Arrow keys
Open file, folder or icon <ENTER>
Exit & Save <ENTER>
Close/Exit & Do Not Save <ESC>
Navigate Dialogue Boxes <TAB>
To move cursor up <SHIFT> <TAB>
Select Radio Button/Press Button <SPACE>
Go to System Menu <BLUE><0>
Folder
File
Program Icon
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 63
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
The Startup Desktop
If you have a touchscreen:
• Double-tap on the appropriate icon – either a folder icon, a program icon or
a file icon – to open or launch your selection.
4.3 The Startup Desktop
When the 7535 boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed. Any applications
stored in the Startup folder will start up immediately.
Figure 4.2 The 7535 Startup Desktop
4.3.1 Accessing Desktop Icons
• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon, and press <ENTER> to launch the
highlighted icon.
If you have a touchscreen:
• Tap on the icon to open a window or, in the case of an application icon,
launch an application.
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
The Taskbar
64 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
4.3.2 The Taskbar
Figure 4.3 The Taskbar
The 7535 is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It displays icons
through which you can view the security level, battery capacity and radio signal
quality of your unit. If the hand-held is attached to a charger, cradle, docking station
or PDM, an associated icon is displayed.
The taskbar also displays active modifier keys – <SHIFT>, <ALT>, <CTRL>,
<BLUE> and <ORANGE>. Keys that have been locked “on” are displayed in
uppercase letters. For example, if you press the <CTRL> key twice to lock it “on”, it
is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar.
4.3.2.1 Using The Taskbar
• Press <BLUE> <0> to display the System Menu.
• Type <Y> to choose System Tray from the menu.
• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you’d
like more information.
• Press <SPACE> to display the appropriate dialogue box.
If you have a touchscreen:
• Using the stylus, tap on the indicator you want to view – the battery icon for
example – to display a dialogue box listing the current battery capacity
information.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 65
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
The System Menu
4.4 The System Menu
The System Menu lists the operations you can access and work with. It is available from
the startup desktop or from within any application.
To display the menu:
• Press <BLUE> <0> (zero).
Figure 4.4 System Menu
• Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item, and press <ENTER>, or
If the menu item has an underlined character:
• Type the underlined alpha character – for example, to display Windows
Explorer, type the letter e.
If you have a touchscreen:
• Tap on the item in the menu with which you want to work.
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
The System Menu
66 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
The Control Panel
The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware, the operating system
and the shell. If your 7535 is running with the Psion Teklogix Tekterm application or
another application, additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel.
Figure 4.5 Control Panel
The Desktop
Choosing the Desktop option from the System Menu displays the 7535 desktop.
The Explorer
The Psion Teklogix Explorer application operates much like the standard
Windows® Explorer. It is used to open, create, delete, rename and otherwise
manipulate files and folders.
The Security Level
The 7535 shell displays the levels of security you can choose form. To change
security levels:
• Choose Security Level from the System Menu.
• Select a security level from the dialogue box, and type the appropriate
password.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 67
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
The System Menu
The System Tray
The System Tray option allows access to the icons in the taskbar at the bottom
of the screen. The taskbar displays indicators such as a battery capacity gauge and
the security level. These indicators are attached to dialogue boxes that provide
additional information.
• Choose System Tray from the System Menu.
When System Tray is chosen, the taskbar icons become accessible. To display
the dialogue box attached to an icon:
• Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon – for example – the security icon.
• Press <SPACE> to display the security level dialogue box.
If you have a touchscreen:
• Tap on the icon with which you want to work. The associated dialogue box
is displayed.
The Task Manager
The Task Manager option allows you to switch to another task or to end an
active task. To display the task manager window:
• Press <BLUE><0><T>, or
• Press <ALT> <ESC>.
Note: When the 7535 security level is set to ‘Supervisor’, all the buttons in the
sample screen above are accessible. If the security level is set to ‘User’,
the ‘Run’ and ‘End Task’ buttons are not visible.
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
Using A Dialogue Box
68 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Cycle Tasks
When Cycle Tasks is selected (and the Task Manager is not open), you can
cycle through active applications. To choose this option:
• Press <BLUE><0>, and type <C>, or
• Press <ALT> <TAB>.
Power Info
Selecting Power Info from the System Menu displays the Power Properties dialogue
box. This dialogue box indicates the remaining charge capacity of the battery.
4.5 Using A Dialogue Box
A dialogue box like the samples in Figure 4.6 appears when you need to make
selections and enter further information.
You can move between dialogue items by tapping on them, or by pressing the arrow
keys and the <TAB> key. (<SHIFT> <TAB> moves the cursor backwards.)
Figure 4.6 Dialogue Boxes
Note: If your unit is equipped with a touchscreen, you can use the stylus to tap
on an element in a dialogue box to select or deselect it, display dropdown
menu items, save your selections, and so on.
Checkbox Dropdown Menu
Button
Textbox
Radio
Button
Tabs
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 69
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE
Using A Dialogue Box
Dialogue boxes contain one or more of the following elements:
Tab: A tab separates different elements of a dialogue box. Press the <TAB> key
until the left-most tab in the dialogue box is highlighted. To select the next tab, press
the <RIGHT> arrow key.
Textbox: A textbox requires that you type information. Press the <TAB> key to
highlight the textbox and then type the appropriate information.
Dropdown: This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows next to the
dropdown menu to indicate that additional options are available. Press the <TAB>
key to highlight the menu, and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to cycle through
the options.
Checkbox: This box allows you to select or deselect an option. To select or deselect
a checkbox, press the <TAB> key to highlight the checkbox, and press the
<SPACE> key to select (√) or deselect it.
Radio buttons: These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options. For
example, in the sample screen in Figure 4.6 on page 68 you can choose to ‘Obtain an
IP address via DHCP’ or ‘Specify an IP address’. Press the <TAB> key to highlight a radio
button option, and then select a radio button by pressing the arrow keys to highlight
the appropriate option.
Buttons: This type of button allows you to ‘Save’, ‘Delete’ and so on the options
you’ve chosen in a dialogue box. Use the <TAB> key to highlight the button you
want to use. Press the <ENTER> key to activate it.
Saving Your Choices: Once you’ve made all your changes, press the <ENTER>
key to save your changes and exit the window.
Note: A dialogue box item that is displayed in grey text indicates that it is not
currently available.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 71
CONFIGURATION 5
5
5.1 The Control Panel ..............................73
5.2 Control Panel Icons .............................74
5.3 Basic Setup .................................76
5.3.1 Display Properties ..........................76
5.3.1.1 Display Contrast .......................77
5.3.1.2 Display Backlight ......................77
5.3.1.3 Display Appearance .....................79
5.3.2 Keyboard Properties .........................80
5.3.2.1 Key Repeat..........................80
5.3.2.2 Keyboard Backlight .....................81
5.3.2.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes .................82
5.3.3 Power Management Properties ....................83
5.3.3.1 Battery Capacity .......................83
5.3.3.2 Power Saving Schemes ...................84
5.3.4 Calibrating The Touchscreen .....................85
5.4 Advanced Configuration ..........................86
5.5 Scanner Properties .............................86
5.5.1 Scanner Options ...........................87
5.5.2 Bar Codes ...............................89
5.5.3 Bar Code Settings...........................90
5.5.3.1 Code 39 Settings .......................90
5.5.3.2 Code 128 Settings ......................93
5.5.3.3 EAN 13 Settings .......................94
5.5.3.4 EAN 8 ............................96
5.5.3.5 UPC And EAN Settings ...................97
5.5.3.6 UPC A Settings .......................97
5.5.3.7 UPC E Settings .......................98
5.5.3.8 Codabar Size And Characters ................99
5.5.3.9 Code 93 Size And Characters ................99
5.5.3.10 Code 11.......................... 100
5.5.3.11 I 2 of 5 Settings...................... 101
5.5.3.11 I 2 of 5 Settings...................... 101
5.5.3.12 MSI/PLESSY Settings...................102
5.5.3.13 D 2 of 5 Settings ......................103
5.5.3.14 IATA 2 of 5 Settings ....................104
5.5.3.15 Postal: Australian .....................104
5.5.3.16 Postal: Japanese ......................105
5.5.3.17 Postal: Korean .......................105
5.5.3.18 Postal: PlaNET.......................105
5.5.3.19 Postal: PostNET ......................105
5.5.3.20 Postal: Royal Mail .....................105
5.5.3.21 DataMatrix (2D) ......................106
5.5.3.22 Maxicode (2D).......................106
5.5.3.23 PDF-417 (2D) .......................106
5.5.3.24 Micro PDF-417 (2D) ...................107
5.5.3.25 QR Code (2D) .......................107
5.5.3.26 RSS Code (2D) ......................107
5.5.3.27 Aztec ............................107
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 73
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Control Panel
5.1 The Control Panel
The Windows CE Control Panel provides a group of icons through which you can set a
variety of system-wide properties, such as mouse sensitivity, network configuration
and the desktop color scheme.
Note: If you are uncertain how to move around a dialogue box and make selec-
tions, review “Using A Dialogue Box” on page 68.
When the 7535 boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed, and any
applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately.
To access the Windows CE Control Panel:
• Press BLUE> <0> to display the System Menu.
• Highlight Control Panel, and press <ENTER>.
If you have a touchscreen:
• Use the stylus to tap on the Control Panel icon on your desktop.
The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your 7535.
Figure 5.1 Control Panel
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
74 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.2 Control Panel Icons
The Windows CE Control Panel provides a group of icons that allow you to customize
and adjust settings on your 7535.
Date/Time
Allows you to set the current Month, Date, Time and Time Zone on your
unit.
Display
Changes the appearance (window colour scheme) on the unit desktop.
Keyboard
Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated
characters. It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and
intensity.
Volume & Sound
Allows you to adjust the volume of the beep that is emitted to indicate
events like warnings, key clicks and, if your unit is equipped with a touch-
screen, screen taps.
Sounds (wave files) cannot be reproduced on 7535 units. The beeper
volume and the conditions under which it sounds are tailored from within
the application installed on your unit.
Mouse Properties
For units equipped with touchscreens, this icon allows you to customize the
sensitivity and speed of the stylus double-click.
Owner
Provides fields in which you can specify owner information. A ‘Notes’ tab
allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is
powered up. ‘Network ID’ tab information is used to access network resources.
(This information should be provided by your System Administrator.)
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 75
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
Password
Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit.
Once assigned, password access cannot be circumvented so it is important
that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place.
Power
Displays battery pack power status. The ‘Power Scheme’ tab allows you to
define power saving modes. You can define the number of minutes after
which the units becomes ‘User Idle’, ‘System Idle’ and when the unit will go into
a ‘Suspend’ state to preserve battery power. (Refer to “Power Saving
Schemes” on page 84 for details.) A ‘Device’ tab lists device names and
power levels.
Alternately, battery status can be accessed through the taskbar.
Regional Settings
Allows you to specify the local language the display text will use along
with the format of numbers, currency, time and date for your region.
Remove Programs
Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit. To remove a pro-
gram, select it and then click on the Remove button.
Stylus
Adjusts how Windows CE recognizes your double-tap (as slow or rapid
successive taps).
Under the ‘Calibration’ tab, you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping
on the ‘Recalibrate’ button and following the directions on the calibration
screen.
System
Displays system and memory properties. Under the Memory tab, you can
allocate memory between storage memory and program memory.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Basic Setup
76 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Dialing
Specifies dialing settings, including area code, country code, dial type and
the code to disable call waiting. You can store multiple patterns – for exam-
ple, ‘Work’, ‘Home’, and so on using this dialogue box.
PC Connection
Enables direct connections to a desktop computer. Selecting the ‘Change Con-
nection’ button allows you to change the type of direct connect to your PC.
Network And Dial-up Connections
Displays a network window from which the 7535 radio can be configured
and an existing configuration can be executed. Refer to “Configuring An
IEEE 802.11 Radio” on page 18 for details.
Note: This icon also provides access to direct or dial-up connections.
This particular feature is reserved for future use.
5.3 Basic Setup
5.3.1 Display Properties
• In the Control Panel, choose the Display icon.
Figure 5.2 Choosing The Display Icon
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 77
Chapter 5: Configuration
Display Contrast
5.3.1.1 Display Contrast
To improve the clarity of the characters on the screen, the 7535 contrast can be
adjusted using the Display Properties dialogue box.
• In the Display Properties dialogue box, open the Contrast tab.
Figure 5.3 Display Contrast Properties
The‘Min – Max’ sliding bar is used to adjust the screen contrast. Sliding the bar to the
left darkens the screen, and sliding it to the right lightens it.
5.3.1.2 Display Backlight
The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time if the ambient light is
below a specified threshold and if the 7535 is in use (key press, scanner trigger or
data received from the host). The Display Properties dialogue box in the Control Panel
allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how the backlight
behaves in low-light conditions and when the unit is not in use.
Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Display Backlight
78 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• In the Display Properties dialogue box, open the Backlight tab.
Figure 5.4 Display Backlight Properties
Important: The backlight can be configured to stay on continuously, but this
will cause a significant drain on the battery power.
The Backlight tab allows you to specify the backlight ‘On Threshold’, ‘Intensity’ and
‘OFF Timeout’.
ON Threshold
The 7535 is equipped with an ambient light sensor. This sliding bar allows you to
determine how dark the ambient light needs to be before the backlight turns on.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 79
Chapter 5: Configuration
Display Appearance
Intensity
This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 7535 screen. Sliding the bar
to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity.
OFF Timeout
The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the
backlight stays on when a unit is not in use
5.3.1.3 Display Appearance
• In the Display Properties dialogue box, open the Appearance tab.
Figure 5.5 Display Appearance Properties
This dialogue box allows you to customize the display colour scheme.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
80 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.3.2 Keyboard Properties
This menu item displays the Keyboard Properties dialogue box in which you can adjust
the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour
of the <BLUE> and <ORANGE> modifier keys.
• In the Control Panel, choose the Keyboard icon.
Figure 5.6 Choosing The Keyboard Icon
5.3.2.1 Key Repeat
In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the Repeat tab.
Figure 5.7 Key Repeat Properties
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 81
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Backlight
Repeat Delay
The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between
repeat characters. Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between
key repeats while sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time.
Repeat Rate
The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you
press repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). Sliding the bar to the
left slows the repeat rate, and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate.
Note: Use the field at the bottom of this dialogue box to test the repeat delay and
rate settings you’ve chosen.
5.3.2.2 Keyboard Backlight
• In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the Backlight tab.
Figure 5.8 Keyboard Backlight Properties
ON Threshold
The ON Threshold sliding bar allows you to determine how dark the ambient light needs
to be before the keyboard backlight turns on.
Intensity
This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 7535 keyboard backlight.
Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity, and sliding it to
the right lightens the intensity.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard One Shot Modes
82 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.3.2.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes
• In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the One Shots tab.
Figure 5.9 Keyboard One Shot Properties
When these options are enabled (√), the <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys only
remain active until the next key is pressed. If the ‘One Shots’ options are disabled
(the checkbox is left blank), the <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys are locked ‘on’
when pressed only once; they remain ‘on’ until they are pressed a second time to
unlock them.
Note: Keep in mind that the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays these
keys in uppercase characters – BLUE KEY and ORANGE KEY – only when they
are locked ‘on’.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 83
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Management Properties
5.3.3 Power Management Properties
This menu item displays a Power Properties dialogue box that indicates the unit’s battery
capacity and allows you to manage battery use.
• In the Control Panel, choose the Power icon.
Figure 5.10 Choosing The Power Icon
5.3.3.1 Battery Capacity
• In the Power Properties dialogue box, open the Battery tab.
Figure 5.11 Power Battery Properties
The Battery tab details information about the battery installed in your 7535.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Saving Schemes
84 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.3.3.2 Power Saving Schemes
• In the Power Properties dialogue box, open the Schemes tab.
Figure 5.12 Power Scheme Properties
Note: The Power Properties Scheme settings are cumulative – that is, to determine
when the 7535 enters ‘Suspend’ state, the unit waits for the ‘User Idle’
state to elapse, followed by the ‘System Idle’ state and then, once the
‘Suspend’ state time has elapsed, ‘Suspend’ state is activated.
When setting the User Idle State,System Idle State and Suspend State, keep the following in
mind. Because the 7535 ‘wakes up’ from the User Idle and System Idle states almost
instantaneously following any user input (keypress, trigger press, screen tap), the
timeouts you set will not slow user activity. The sum of the User Idle,System Idle and
Suspend timeouts should be selected carefully since the 7535 will go to sleep (appear
off) when this time has elapsed, saving battery power. Psion Teklogix recommends
starting with a total of 10 minutes for this timeout. Setting any of these timeouts to
‘Never’ will adversely affect the battery run time.
To further reduce power consumption, carefully consider the duration of time that
the display backlight is ‘on’ (see “Display Backlight” on page 77).
Power Scheme
This dropdown menu allows you to identify whether the unit is using AC Power or
Battery Power.
User Idle State
User Idle means that the 7535 is not receiving any user input including activities like a
key touch, a scan, and so on – any user initiated activity. When the time selected in
the ‘Switch state to User Idle’ menu elapses, the hand-held enters a User Idle state and
begins to monitor the time specified in the System Idle state menu.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 85
Chapter 5: Configuration
Calibrating The Touchscreen
System Idle State
System activity includes computer activity such as serial data, an activity initiated
by an application, and so on – any activity not executed by the user. System Idle is
activated when the time specified in the ‘Switch state to User Idle’ and the ‘Switch state to
System Idle’ menu have elapsed without any activity. The 7535 begins to monitor the
Suspend field.
Suspend State
Once the time specified in the User Idle and the System Idle fields have elapsed, the 7535
begins to count down the time specified in the ‘Switch state to Suspend’. When the time
in the Suspend field elapses, the unit enters Suspend state.
In Suspend state, the 7535 CPU enters a sleep state and all peripherals are powered
down to minimize power consumption. The state of the device (RAM contents) is
preserved. Pressing <ENTER> or the <SCAN> button wakes the system from
suspend state. When the 7535 is in suspend state, the network connection is broken.
To resume, you must re-establish the network connection.
5.3.4 Calibrating The Touchscreen
Note: Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit. If your screen
appears to require recalibration, contact your supervisor.
Touchscreens rarely require recalibration. However, if your touchscreen has never
been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on
an item, follow the directions below.
• In the Control Panel, select the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window.
Figure 5.13 Stylus Icon
Chapter 5: Configuration
Advanced Configuration
86 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• Choose the Calibration tab and then the Recalibrate button.
Figure 5.14 Calibration Screen
• Follow the directions on the calibration screen to recalibrate the screen.
5.4 Advanced Configuration
5.5 Scanner Properties
The Scanner Properties icon in the Control Panel provides dialogue boxes in which you can
tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize.
Figure 5.15 Bar Code Options
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 87
Chapter 5: Configuration
Scanner Options
5.5.1 Scanner Options
Verify
The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional
decodes required after the initial decode before a bar code is accepted. Higher
values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code but also improve
the reliability of the decoded bar code.
Security
This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge bar codes
(Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN). Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads,
but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code. The default value of
30 is generally a good compromise setting.
Short Code
When enabled (√), this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar codes (2
characters). When disabled, these short bar codes are rejected.
Enabling “Short Code” may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the
7535 must decode more potential bar codes; it is therefore not recommended for
general-purpose bar codes with 4 or more characters.
Double Click Options
Click Time
Note: This parameter only affects 7535s using scanners with aiming dot capa-
bility.
This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click.
If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this
time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of
zero disables this feature.
A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is
assigned in the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click
Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the
“Dot Time” parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for
the “Click Data” parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click
Data” value rather than initiating a scan.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Scanner Options
88 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Click Data
For both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which
character is sent to the application installed in your 7535 following a double-click.
Enter the ASCII value of the character desired from 0 to 255. You can also press the
<LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow keys to scroll through a set of ASCII characters not
available from the keyboard.
Display Options
Indicator
When this parameter is enabled (√), the laser warning logo appears on the display
whenever the scanner is activated.
Result
When this parameter is enabled (√), the type of bar code and the result of the scan
appear on the screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful
decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is
released, this information is cleared from the screen.
Dot Time
The value selected for “Dot Time” determines how long the targeting dot remains on
before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. The allowable values are:
0, 0.1, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 and 3.0 seconds. A value of 0 (zero)
disables the target dot.
Result Time
The value assigned to the “Result Time” parameter determines how long the scan
results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in
seconds, and a value of “0” (zero) disables the parameter.
Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has
expired, perform an unsuccessful scan.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 89
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bar Codes
5.5.2 Bar Codes
Figure 5.16 Bar Code Selection
All the available bar code symbologies can be selected from this menu. For each
symbology, there are options in a ‘Settings’ and a ‘Size/Char’ sub-menu. The unit
automatically discriminates between the selected codes. Some restrictions may
apply.
Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (
√
) only
those codes that are required by the application.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bar Code Settings
90 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.5.3 Bar Code Settings
Figure 5.17 Code 39 Bar Code Settings
Note: Options that are not available with a particular bar code are displayed in
grey characters like the ‘Addendum’ option in the sample screen above
and are not accessible in the dialogue box.
5.5.3.1 Code 39 Settings
Full Ascii
If this parameter is enabled (√), the characters +, %, and / are used as escape
characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character
is converted to an equivalent ASCII character.
Include Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the check digit is included with the decoded bar
code data.
AIAG Strip
If this parameter is enabled (√), the AIAG data identifier is removed from each
decoded Code 39 label. The data identifier occurs in the first position next to the
Code 39 start character. It can be a single alphabetic character or a series of numeric
digits followed by an alphabetic character. This identifier defines the general
category or specific use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 91
Chapter 5: Configuration
Code 39 Settings
Note: If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix TESS application, this
parameter should not be used in conjunction with the TESS AIAG feature.
This is because the 7535 hand-held performs the strip function before it
processes the data through the AIAG feature; if the prefix is stripped, the
data is not identified as AIAG.
Err Accept
If the “Err Accept” and “AIAG Strip” parameters are enabled (√), all label data
without an AIAG identifier character is accepted. If the “Err Accept” parameter is
disabled and the “AIAG Strip” parameter is enabled (√), the label data is not
accepted.
Mod Chks
Mod 43 Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the Mod 43 check digit is calculated.
Mod 10 Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated.
None
If you choose ‘None’, a check is not executed.
Size/Chars
Figure 5.18 Size And Character Settings
Chapter 5: Configuration
Code 39 Settings
92 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Field Size
The field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and
the prefix and suffix characters are added. If the field size is non-zero, only
bar codes of that length are passed through.
Prefix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code.
Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if no
prefix is to be added.
Suffix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code.
Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if
no suffix is to be added.
Strip Leading
This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the
beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.
Notes: 1. The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character.
For example, if <BKSP> is pressed, the usual action for that key is
performed. If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI
emulation application, the 7535 transmits the escape sequence asso-
ciated with the function immediately after the bar code data.
2. For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the
“Strip Leading”.
Strip Trailing
The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be
removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 93
Chapter 5: Configuration
Code 128 Settings
5.5.3.2 Code 128 Settings
Figure 5.19 Code 128 Bar Code Options
Include Sym
Enabling (√) “Include Sym” causes the group separator(s) and start code contained
in this type of bar code to be displayed on the screen.
Note: This option is available only when ‘EAN/UCC 128’ is selected.
Variations
When using Code 128, you can choose the variation or type of bar code variation the
scanner will recognize. The options available are Standard,UCC and EAN/UCC.
These options are described below.
Standard
Enable (√) “Standard” if Code 128 is desired.
UCC 128
“UCC” is a variation of Code 128.
EAN/UCC 128
To successfully scan this type of bar code, “EAN/UCC” must be enabled (√).
“EAN/UCC” bar codes include group separators and start codes.
Size/Chars
Refer to the description beginning on page 91 for details.
Chapter 5: Configuration
EAN 13 Settings
94 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.5.3.3 EAN 13 Settings
Figure 5.20 Ean 13 Settings
Inc Country
If this parameter is enabled (√), the country code is included with the decoded bar
code data.
Include Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the check digit is included with the decoded bar
code data.
Addendum
Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter
in the Options menu (see page 87) must be enabled (
√
).
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code.
This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Optional and Required.
Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized
or ignored.
When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an
addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for
an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the
parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code
without an addendum.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 95
Chapter 5: Configuration
EAN 13 Settings
Size/Chars
Figure 5.21 Size/Char Dialogue Box
Prefix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code.
Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if no
prefix is to be added.
Suffix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code.
Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if
no suffix is to be added.
Strip Leading
This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the
beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.
Note: 1.The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character. For
example, if <BKSP> is pressed, the usual action for that key is per-
formed. If your 7535 is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulation
application, the hand-held transmits the escape sequence associated with
the function immediately after the bar code data.
Strip Trailing
The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be
removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.
Chapter 5: Configuration
EAN 8
96 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.5.3.4 EAN 8
Figure 5.22 EAN 8 Settings
Include Chk
If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded
bar code data.
Addendum
Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter
in the Options menu (see page 87) must be enabled (
√
).
Refer to “Addendum” on page 94.
Size/Chars
See “Size/Chars” beginning on page 95.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 97
Chapter 5: Configuration
UPC And EAN Settings
5.5.3.5 UPC And EAN Settings
Figure 5.23 UPC And EAN Settings
Supplementals
Enabling (√) this parameter allows supplementary data to be decoded.
Size/Char
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.6 UPC A Settings
Figure 5.24 UPC A Settings
Chapter 5: Configuration
UPC E Settings
98 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Inc Num Sys
If this parameter is enabled (√), the number system digit is included with the
decoded bar code data.
Include Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the check digit will be included with the decoded
bar code data.
Addendum
Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter
in the Options menu (see page 87) must be enabled (
√
).
Refer to “Addendum” on page 94.
Size/Chars
Refer to page 95 for details.
5.5.3.7 UPC E Settings
Figure 5.25 UPC E Settings
Exp to UPC A
Enabling (√) this parameter results in a non-standard decoding that returns 12 digits
from the 6 digit UPC E bar code.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 99
Chapter 5: Configuration
Codabar Size And Characters
Inc Num Sys
If this parameter is enabled (√), the number system digit is included with the
decoded bar code data.
Include Chk
When enabled (√), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Addendum
Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter
in the Options menu (see page 87) must be enabled (
√
).
Refer to “Addendum” on page 94.
Size/Chars
Refer to page 95 for details.
5.5.3.8 Codabar Size And Characters
Size/Char
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.9 Code 93 Size And Characters
Size/Char
Refer to page 91 for details.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Code 11
100 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.5.3.10 Code 11
Figure 5.26 Code 11 Settings
Include Chk
If “Include Chk” is enabled (√), the check digit is included with the decoded bar
code data.
1 Chk Digit
If this parameter is enabled (√), it is assumed that the last digit is a
check digit.
2 Chk Digits
If this parameter is enabled (√), it is assumed that the last two digits are
check digits.
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 101
Chapter 5: Configuration
I 2 of 5 Settings
5.5.3.11 I 2 of 5 Settings
Figure 5.27 I 2 of 5 Settings
Mod 10 Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This
calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit.
ITF Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated.
Include Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the check digit is included with the decoded bar
code data.
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
Chapter 5: Configuration
MSI/PLESSY Settings
102 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.5.3.12 MSI/PLESSY Settings
Figure 5.28 MSI/PLESSY Settings
1 Chk Digit
If this parameter is enabled (√), it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit.
Include Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the check digit is included with the decoded bar
code data.
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 103
Chapter 5: Configuration
D 2 of 5 Settings
5.5.3.13 D 2 of 5 Settings
Figure 5.29 D 2 of 5 Settings
Mod 10 Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This
calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit.
ITF Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated.
Include Chk
If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded
bar code data.
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
Chapter 5: Configuration
IATA 2 of 5 Settings
104 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.5.3.14 IATA 2 of 5 Settings
Figure 5.30 IATA 2 of 5 Settings
Mod 10 Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated.
ITF Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated.
Include Chk
If this parameter is enabled (√), the check digit is included with the decoded bar
code data.
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.15 Postal: Australian
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 105
Chapter 5: Configuration
Postal: Japanese
5.5.3.16 Postal: Japanese
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.17 Postal: Korean
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.18 Postal: PlaNET
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.19 Postal: PostNET
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.20 Postal: Royal Mail
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
Chapter 5: Configuration
DataMatrix (2D)
106 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.5.3.21 DataMatrix (2D)
Figure 5.31 DataMatrix (2D)
Inverse Video
If enabled (√), this parameter allows symbols that contain light cells on a dark
background to be decoded.
Rectangular Symbols
When enabled (√), this parameter allows rectangular DataMatrix symbols to be
decoded.
Small Symbols
If enabled (√), DataMatrix symbols of small physical size can be successfully
decoded.
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.22 Maxicode (2D)
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.23 PDF-417 (2D)
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 107
Chapter 5: Configuration
Micro PDF-417 (2D)
5.5.3.24 Micro PDF-417 (2D)
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.25 QR Code (2D)
Figure 5.32 QR Code Settings
Inverse Video
If enabled (√), this parameter allows symbols that contain light cells on a dark
background to be decoded.
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.26 RSS Code (2D)
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
5.5.3.27 Aztec
Size/Chars
Refer to page 91 for details.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 109
TEKTERM APPLICATION 6
6
6.1 The Tekterm Application ...........................113
6.2 Additional Keyboard Functions .......................113
6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkey Function Keys ..............113
6.2.1.1 Function Keys .........................113
6.2.1.2 Softkey Function Keys .....................114
6.2.2 Macro Keys ..............................115
6.3 Keyboard Modes ...............................116
6.3.1 View Mode ...............................116
6.3.1.1 Changing Font Sizes ......................116
6.3.1.2 Panning The Screen Contents .................116
6.3.1.3 Exiting View Mode.......................117
6.3.2 Menu Mode And Switching Between Applications ..........118
6.3.2.1 Using The Task Manager To Switch Between Applications . .118
6.4 The Tekterm Status Area ...........................119
6.5 TESS Emulation ...............................120
6.5.1 Configuration..............................120
6.5.5.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement ...........122
6.5.5.2 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS ................123
6.5.5.3 <BKSP> Key Behaviour In TESS ...............124
6.5.2 Working With Multiple Sessions....................120
6.5.3 The Field Types ............................120
6.5.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys ......................121
6.5.5 Data Entry ...............................121
6.5.6 TESS Status Message .........................125
6.5.7 Lock Messages.............................126
6.5.8 Control Commands ..........................126
6.5.9 Resetting A TESS Session .......................126
6.5.10 The Local Menu ...........................127
6.5.11 Selecting Another Host Computer ..................127
6.5.12 Queuing Mode ............................128
6.6 ANSI Emulation ...............................128
110 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.6.1 Configuration ..............................128
6.6.2 Sending Data To The Host .......................129
6.6.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys ........129
6.6.4 Block Mode (Local Editing) ......................130
6.6.5 Working With Sessions .........................131
6.6.5.1 Establishing A New Session .................131
6.6.5.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions.......131
6.6.5.3 Closing A Session.......................131
6.6.5.4 Printing A Screen .......................132
6.6.5.5 Smart Echo – Disabling....................132
6.7 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu......................132
6.8 Working With Menus .............................133
6.8.1 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus ..........133
6.8.1.1 Sub-Menus ..........................133
6.8.1.2 Numeric Parameters......................134
6.8.1.3 Y/N Parameters ........................134
6.8.1.4 Alpha Parameters .......................134
6.8.1.5 String Entry Parameters....................135
6.8.2 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus .........137
6.8.2.1 Sub-Menus ..........................137
6.8.2.2 Numeric Parameters......................137
6.8.2.3 Y/N Parameters ........................138
6.8.2.4 Alpha Parameters .......................138
6.8.2.5 String Entry Parameters....................138
6.8.3 Saving Changes To Parameters.....................138
6.8.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values ..................139
6.9 Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held Computer ..................139
6.10 The Parameters Menu ............................139
6.10.1 Security Settings............................140
6.11 Display Options ...............................140
6.12 More Parameters...............................141
6.13 Radio Parameters ..............................142
6.14 System Parameters..............................145
6.14.1 Keyboard ...............................145
6.14.1.1 Macros ............................145
6.14.1.2 Indicators ..........................148
6.14.1.3 Softkeys ...........................149
6.14.1.4 Cntrl Panel ..........................149
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 111
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
6.14.2 Audio .................................150
6.14.3 Power Mgmt .............................151
6.14.4 Security ................................151
6.14.4.1 Default Mode .........................151
6.14.4.2 User Level Options ......................152
6.14.4.3 Sup. Password.........................152
6.15 Scanner Control Panel............................153
6.16 View Manager ................................154
6.16.1 Split Screen ..............................155
6.16.1.1 Splitting And Displaying Screens...............155
6.16.1.2 Moving Between Split Screens ................156
6.16.1.3 Toggling Between Full & Split Screens ...........156
6.16.1.4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card .............157
6.16.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™) ...................157
6.16.2.1 Creating A Unicode™ Character ...............157
6.16.2.2 Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window .........158
6.17 Applications .................................160
6.17.1 ANSI Settings.............................161
6.17.1.1 Host Conn ...........................162
6.17.1.2 Screen .............................163
6.17.1.3 Xmit Modes ..........................166
6.17.1.4 Kbd Modes ..........................170
6.17.1.5 Edit Modes ..........................173
6.17.1.6 Serial .............................174
6.17.1.7 Host Char Set .........................174
6.17.1.8 Anchor View .........................175
6.17.2 TESS Settings.............................176
6.17.2.1 Host Conn. ..........................177
6.17.2.2 Screen .............................178
6.17.2.3 Characters ...........................180
6.17.2.4 Tests ..............................182
6.17.2.5 Features ............................183
6.17.2.6 Scanner ............................186
6.17.2.7 Fields .............................188
6.17.2.8 Anchor View .........................190
6.18 Ports– Tether And Console .........................191
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
112 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.18.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options .............191
6.18.2 Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings .............192
6.18.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters ............195
6.18.3.1 Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport .......195
6.18.3.2 Scan-See Keyboard Mapping ......................200
6.19 Network ...................................201
6.19.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings......................201
6.19.1.1 NETWLAN – Configuring The Radio ...........202
6.19.2 802.IQ v2 ...............................202
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 113
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
The Tekterm Application
6.1 The Tekterm Application
Tekterm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data
transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers. The 7535 includes
unique features that support Tekterm – a Psion Teklogix application that has the
ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers.
6.2 Additional Keyboard Functions
In addition to the standard keyboard functions (see “The Keyboard” on page 37),
Tekterm supports additional keys – function keys, softkeys and macro keys – that
are unique to this application.
6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkey Function Keys
6.2.1.1 Function Keys
The 7535 is equipped with a series of function key. The function of each of these
keys is defined in the application software. Depending on the type of keyboard your
7535 has – 58-key or 36-key – the number and location of the function keys on the
keyboard varies slightly.
58-Key Keyboard Function Keys
The 58-key keyboard is equipped with thirty function keys. Function keys <F1> to
<F6> are located across the top of the keyboard and are directly accessible – a key
combination is not required. Function keys <F7> to <F30> are colour coded in blue
print above the alpha keys and are accessed using a key combination – <BLUE>
followed by the appropriate alpha key.
To access function keys <F7> to <F30>:
• Press the <BLUE> key followed by the alpha key to which the
function key you want to use is mapped. For example:
To access function key <F7>, press <BLUE> <C>.
To access function key <F8>, press <BLUE> <D>, and so on.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Softkey Function Keys
114 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
36-Key Keyboard Function Keys
The 36-key keyboard is equipped with twenty function keys. Function keys
<F1> to <F4> across the top of the keyboard and <F5> to <F10> at the bottom
of the keyboard are directly accessible – a key combination is not required.
Function keys <F11> to <F20> are colour coded in orange print above function
keys <F1> to <F10>.
To access function keys <F11> to <F20>:
• Press the <ORANGE> key followed by the appropriate function key.
For example:
To access function key <F11>, press the <ORANGE> key followed
by <F1>.
To access function key <F12>, press <ORANGE> followed by <F2>,
and so on.
6.2.1.2 Softkey Function Keys
To speed the process of moving through menus and changing parameters, function
keys <F1> to <F5> have been programmed to perform specific actions in the
Tekterm menus. Table 6.1 describes these function keys.
These softkeys can be reprogrammed to perform different functions within TESS
and ANSI applications.
Important: Keep in mind that you can press function keys <F1> to <F5> to
execute these functions. If your 7535 is equipped with a touch-
screen, you can tap the stylus on the appropriate softkey label,
providing that the labels are visible at the bottom of the 7535
screen. See “Softkeys” on page 149 if they are not visible.
Table 6.1 Softkeys
Function Key Softkey Function
<F1> NEXT – Displays the next sub-menu
<F2> PREV – Displays the previous menu.
<F3> DEFLT – Restores parameters to default settings – even after
pressing <F4> to save the changes.
<F4> SAVE – Saves a change to a parameter value.
<F5> LITRL – LITERL – Literal mode allows special characters
to be entered in a string parameter such as macro key strings.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 115
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Macro Keys
Note: The SAVE onscreen label only appears when a parameter value has
been changed and has not yet been saved.
6.2.2 Macro Keys
7535 hand-helds are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed
to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys
like the <ENTER> key, the <BKSP> key, any function key and arrow key, and so
on.
58-Key Keyboard Macro Keys
7535s with 58-key keyboards have twelve macro keys – <M1> to <M12>. These
keys are colour coded in orange print above alpha keys <O> to <Z>.
To access a macro key:
• Press the <ORANGE> key followed by the appropriate alpha key from
O to Z. For example:
To access macro key <M1>, press <ORANGE> <O>.
To access macro key <M2>, press <ORANGE> <P>, and so on.
Note: To learn how to program macro keys, refer to "Macros" beginning on
page 145.
36-Key Keyboard Macro Keys
36-key keyboards are equipped with six macro keys – <M1> to <M6>. Macro keys
<M1> to <M2> are directly accessible in the bottom row of the keyboard – a key
combination is not required.
Macro keys <M3> and <M4> are colour coded in orange print above macro keys
<M1> and <M2>.
• To access <M3>, press the <ORANGE> key followed by <M1>
• To access <M4>, press <ORANGE> <M2>.
Macro keys <M5> to <M6> are colour coded in blue print above macro keys <M1>
and <M2>.
• To access <M5>, press the <BLUE> key followed by <M1>.
• To access <M6>, press <BLUE> <M2>.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Keyboard Modes
116 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.3 Keyboard Modes
6.3.1 View Mode
Placing the 7535 keyboard in View mode allows you to choose another screen font and
to pan the contents of the screen.
To place the computer keyboard in View mode:
• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <V>.
When the hand-held is in View mode, the onscreen message –
View
– is displayed in the
status area at the bottom of the screen.
Keep in mind that this is a toggle key combination – pressing <CTRL> <ALT> <V>
a second time turns View mode off.
6.3.1.1 Changing Font Sizes
To cycle through the available fonts (with the unit in View mode):
• Press the <F> key.
Each time you press the <F> key, the display font on the screen changes. Once
you’ve displayed the appropriate font:
• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <V> to exit View mode.
6.3.1.2 Panning The Screen Contents
If the content of a screen is too large to fit in the margins of the 7535 display, the
contents can be panned or shifted to bring the information outside the margins into
view. Normally, the Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction
of the arrow pressed. However, if the 7535 is operating in View mode, the <LEFT>,
<RIGHT>, <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys pan the entire content of the screen
rather than the cursor.
• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <V> to place the 7535 in View mode. An onscreen
message – View – is displayed in the status area of the screen.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 117
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Exiting View Mode
Panning relies on the values set in the “Use Increment”, “X Increment” and
“Y Increment” parameters to determine the number of columns (spaces) and rows
(lines) the screen contents shift.
• In the “More Parameters” menu, position the cursor on “View Manager”
and press <F1>.
• First, enable the “Use Increment” parameter – set it to “Y”.
“X Increment” determines the number of columns (spaces) the screen pans when
the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key is pressed in View mode.
“Y Increment” determines the number of rows (lines) the screen pans when the
<UP> or <DOWN> arrow key is pressed in View mode.
• Assign a value to the “X Increment” and “Y Increment” parameters.
To pan the screen contents:
• Press the <RIGHT>, <LEFT>, <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key.
Note: Pressing the <LEFT> arrow pans the screen to the right, pressing the
<RIGHT> arrow pans the screen to the left, and so on.
6.3.1.3 Exiting View Mode
To exit View mode and resume normal operation:
• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <V> again.
Note: You can press the <BLUE> key followed by the appropriate arrow key
each time you want to pan the contents one increment at a time in the
direction of the arrow key without placing the 7535 in View mode.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Menu Mode And Switching Between Applications
118 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.3.2 Menu Mode And Switching Between Applications
When the keyboard is in Menu mode, the System Menu is displayed so that you can move
between active applications. (More information about System Menu items is provided in
Chapter 4, beginning on page 65.)
To place the 7535 in Menu mode:
• Press <BLUE> <0> (zero).
Figure 6.1 System Menu
6.3.2.1 Using The Task Manager To Switch Between Applications
Note: If you have a touchscreen, you can tap on Task Manager items to switch
between applications, run a new application or end a task. To navigate
using the keyboard, follow the description outlined below.
To display the Task Manager screen:
• Use the arrow keys to highlight Task Manager, and press <ENTER>, or
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 119
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
The Tekterm Status Area
• Just type the underlined alpha character – in this case, the letter ‘t’.
Figure 6.2 Task Manager Screen
Note: A shortcut – to bypass the System Menu and go directly to the
‘Task Manager’ screen, press <ALT> <ESC>.
To switch between applications:
• Highlight the application you want to work with, and press <ENTER>.
You can also use this screen to Run (start) another application not listed in the
‘Task Manager’ screen, or you can choose End Task to close an application.
6.4 The Tekterm Status Area
Tekterm provides a status area just above the softkey labels. The status area indi-
cates the operating condition of the hand-held. Table 6.2 outlines the options dis-
played in the status area.
Table 6.2 Status Area
Status Area Indicators
Application The active application is displayed in the status area – for example, Tekterm.
Security Level
Within Tekterm
The security level assigned within the Tekterm application is displayed in the
status area. One of the following is displayed – User, Supervisor or Teklogix.
View Mode When <CTRL><ALT><V> is typed to place the 7535 in View mode, this
information is displayed in the status area.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
TESS Emulation
120 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.5 TESS Emulation
TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) is the normal operating mode of Psion Teklogix
computers. Teklogix protocol emulation software resident on network controllers or
a Psion Teklogix Software Development Kit (SDK) and installed in the host
converts host screens to TESS commands. The 9150 Access Point is also equipped
with protocol emulation software.
Note: If the message “RESET: Press Enter” flashes at the bottom of the TESS
screen when you turn on the 7535, press the <ENTER> key once.
6.5.1 Configuration
Note: Each TESS session must have a unique name assigned to it. The title
you assign will be displayed in the Display Menu.
The process of renaming an existing TESS session and adding a new session is
described in the section titled, “Applications” on page 160.
A unique number must be assigned in the “Terminal #” parameter for each TESS
session. Refer to “Terminal #” in the section titled “TESS Settings” on page 176
for details.
6.5.2 Working With Multiple Sessions
To display another session in TESS:
• Go to the startup ‘Display Menu’. If you are in a TESS session, press
<CTRL><ALT><0> to go to the ‘Display Menu’.
• Type the letter corresponding to the application you want to launch.
For example, suppose the sessions are listed in the “Display Menu” as
‘D TESS1’ and ‘E TESS2’. To launch the session named TESS2, type
the letter e.
6.5.3 The Field Types
Fixed Field – displays information that cannot be changed from the keyboard.
Entry Field – allows the operator to enter data. This type of field is usually shown
as: “........”
Match Field – the host computer loads data in the format of the expected entry. If
the entered data does not match the expected format, the unit emits a long beep.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 121
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
IBM 5250 Emulation Keys
Auto-tab Field – automatically moves the cursor to the next field when the current
field is filled.
Bar code only Field – is filled with data from a bar code reader. Keyboard entries
are not accepted in this type of field.
Serial I/O Field – is filled with data coming from a serial port. Keyboard input is
not accepted in this type of field.
6.5.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys
The following keys allow the Psion Teklogix computer to better emulate the
functions of a true IBM 5250 terminal.
Note: These keys are active at all times in TESS applications.
6.5.5 Data Entry
The 7535 accepts data until the operator presses a key that sends a transmission to
the host computer. The following actions cause the 7535 to transmit:
• Pressing a function key or the <ENTER> key (which is considered to be
<F0>) causes the 7535 to transmit.
• Completing data entry into a “transmit on entry” field also causes the
7535 to transmit.
Key Function Key Sequence Cursor Movement
Field Advance or
Tab <BLUE> <O>
(PgDn key)
Cursor moves to the first position in the next
input field. If already in the last field, the cursor
moves to the first input field on the screen.
Field Backspace <BLUE> <I>
(PgUp key)
Cursor moves to the beginning of the current
field. If already in the first position, the cursor
moves to beginning of the previous field.
Field Exit <BLUE> <P>
(End key)
Current field is cleared from the cursor position
to the end of the field, and the cursor moves to the
next input field.
Home <BLUE> <N>
(Home key) Cursor moves to the first input field on the screen.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement
122 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
There are several ways to configure the 7535 hand-held to complete a data field:
• Pressing <ENTER> after entering data.
• Pressing a function key after entering data.
• Pressing an arrow key after entering data.
• Filling an auto-tab field.
6.5.5.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement
The TESS editing modes and cursor movements in each type of mode are described
in the table below.
Note: When the “Enter on Arr” parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the <UP>
and <DOWN> arrow keys do not complete an entry field. Refer to
page 188 for details about this parameter.
Field mode
Press <CTRL>fto enter field mode. In this mode, once data entry
into a field has been completed, the entry cannot be changed without
retyping the entire field.
In field mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys do not perform
any functions. Pressing the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key completes
the entry field and then, moves the cursor to the previous or next field.
Fcursor mode
Press <CTRL>uto enter fcursor mode. In this mode, once data
entry into a field has been completed, the entry cannot be changed
without retyping the entire field.
In fcursor mode, the <UP>, <DOWN>, <LEFT> and <RIGHT>
arrow keys move the cursor between fields.
Insert mode
Press <CTRL>ito enter insert mode. In this mode, data can be
entered between two characters that have been previously entered.
In insert mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys move the
cursor right and left within a field. The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow
keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previous or
next field.
Replace mode
Press <CTRL>rto enter replace mode. In this mode, data can be
entered over previously entered characters.
In replace mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys move the
cursor to the right and left within a field. The <UP> and <DOWN>
arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previ-
ous or next field.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 123
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
<DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS
6.5.5.2 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS
Field mode
• In a left justified field, the <DEL> key erases all characters in the
field and places the cursor in the left most position of that field.
• In a right justified field, the <DEL> key erases all characters in the
field and places the cursor in the right most position of that field.
• If the <DEL> key is used to clear data in a field that has been
pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified
and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response
message.
Replace mode
• In both left and right justified fields, the <DEL> key erases charac-
ters beginning from the current cursor position to the end of the
field. The cursor remains in the same position in the field.
• If the <DEL> key is pressed while cursor is in the right most
position in the field, the 7535 emits a keyboard error beep.
• If the <DEL> key is used to clear data in a field that has been
pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified
and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response
message.
Insert mode
• In both left and right justified fields, the <DEL> key erases the
characters from one character position to right of the cursor to
the end of the field.
• If the <DEL> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most
position in the field, the 7535 emits a keyboard error beep.
• If the <DEL> key is used to clear data in a field that has been
pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified
and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response
message.
Fcursor mode • Refer to “Field Mode” at the beginning of this table. The <DEL>
key operates in the same manner in “Fcursor mode” as it does in
“Field mode”.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
<BKSP> Key Behaviour In TESS
124 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.5.5.3 <BKSP> Key Behaviour In TESS
Field mode
• In a left justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character directly
to the left of the cursor and then moves the cursor one position to the
left. When the last character in the field is deleted, the field displays
the value that it contained before it was modified, and the field is
opened.
• In a right justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character on
which the cursor is positioned and shifts the remaining characters to
the right by one position. When the last character in the field is
deleted, the field displays the value that it contained before it was
modified, and the field is opened.
• If the <BKSP> key is pressed when the field is empty, the 7535 emits
a keyboard error beep.
• The <BKSP> key does not delete data pre-filled by the host applica-
tion.
• If the <BKSP> key is pressed in a field that has not been modified, the
7535 emits a keyboard error beep.
• If data is entered into a field and is then deleted before the field is
completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the
field or when the screen is transmitted.
Replace mode
• In a left justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character on which
the cursor is positioned unless it is one position to the right of the last
character in the string; in this case, the <BKSP> key erases the char-
acter to the left of the cursor.
• In a right justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character on
which the cursor is positioned. The remaining characters are then
shifted to the left of the cursor, and the cursor is shifted to the right by
one position.
• If the <BKSP> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most
character position of the field, the cursor does not shift to the left
when that character is erased; it remains in the right most position in
the field.
• When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty –
that is, any pre-filled data is not displayed. Pressing the <BKSP> key
in the empty field results in a keyboard error beep.
• The <BKSP> key can delete data pre-filled by the host application.
• If data is entered in a field and is then deleted before the field is com-
pleted, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field
or when the screen is transmitted.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 125
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
TESS Status Message
6.5.6 TESS Status Message
• Press <CTRL> <S> to continuously display the status message in the
lower left corner of the screen.
• Press <CTRL> <W> to make this message appear only when the 7535
locks. The message should look similar to the sample below:
V6.0 fld 0.6
“V6.0” is the TESS version number. “fld” indicates that TESS is currently in field
mode. Insert and replace mode are represented as “ins” and “rep” respectively. The
number “0.6” indicates the response time of the last transmission in seconds. Press
<CTRL> <T> to display the unit number instead of the TESS version number.
Insert mode
• In a left justified field, the <BKSP> function erases the character on
which the cursor is positioned, unless it is at the right end of the char-
acter string; in this case, it erases the character to the left of the cursor.
When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty,
and any further <BKSP> functions in the empty field result in a key-
board error beep.
• In a right justified field, the <BKSP> function erases the character
that is to the right of the cursor and then shifts the data remaining to
the right one position.
• If the <BKSP> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most
character position of that field, the cursor does not shift to the left
when that character is erased; it remains in the right-most position
in the field.
• When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty –
i.e. any pre-filled data is not displayed. Pressing the BKSP key in the
empty field sounds a keyboard error beep.
• The <BKSP> key can delete data pre-filled by the host application.
• If data is entered into a field and then deleted before the field is com-
pleted, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field
or when the screen is transmitted.
Fcursor mode • Refer to “Field Mode” at the beginning of this table. The <BKSP>
key operates in exactly the same manner in “Fcursor mode” as it does
in “Field mode”.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Lock Messages
126 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.5.7 Lock Messages
When information is transmitted to the host computer, the keyboard locks to
prevent further data entry until the 7535 receives a reply. A locked state is
indicated by either “LOCK-B” (base) or “LOCK-H” (host) in the lower left
corner of the display.
When the reply is received by the 7535, the lock message disappears and the
keyboard can be used again.
6.5.8 Control Commands
A group of <CTRL> key commands can be used within TESS to dictate how the
7535 will operate under a variety of conditions.
• <CTRL> <P> – Reprints the last print page sent from the host. This key
combination will not print anything if a print page from the host was not
previously received at the 7535 hand-held.
• <CTRL> <S> – Displays the 7535 status continuously. Below is a sample
status line as it might appear at the bottom of your screen:
Lock-B/Lock-H fld enh “application name”
• <CTRL> <W> – Displays the 7535 status when the unit is in “Lock B” or
“Lock H” mode. The status line would be similar to the sample above.
• <CTRL><T> – Displays the 7535 status with the terminal number instead
of the name.
Lock-B/Lock-H rep “terminal nn”
• <CTRL> <H> – Displays a menu of available hosts.
6.5.9 Resetting A TESS Session
Resetting a TESS session requires that <CTRL> C be pressed three times within a
two second period to generate the “RESET – User request” message.
• Press and hold down the <CTRL> key, and press the <C> key three times
within a two second period.
• Press <ENTER>.
This procedure restarts the TESS session without affecting the rest of the 7535.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 127
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
The Local Menu
6.5.10 The Local Menu
The host can store local procedures in the 7535 for use when the unit is off-line.
A menu of these procedures appears whenever <CTRL> <L> is pressed
(see Figure 6.3).
• Press the function key corresponding to the procedure you want to perform.
Local procedures will not function when the “Lcl Process” and “Queuing”
parameters are disabled (see “Lcl Process – Save on Reset” on page 183
and “Queuing” on page 183).
Although using local procedures eliminates the advantages of an on-line 7535,
it allows work to continue when the host is unavailable. The “LOCK-B/H”
messages are replaced with “NEXT-B/H” in this mode.
Figure 6.3 Local Menu
6.5.11 Selecting Another Host Computer
• Press <CTRL> <H> or <F9> from the local menu to display a menu of
available hosts.
This menu appears only when more than one host is available.
Figure 6.4 Select Host Screen
Note: This feature will not function when the “Lcl Process” and “Queuing”
parameters are disabled (see “Lcl Process – Save on Reset” on page 183
and “Queuing” on page 183).
LOCAL MENU
F1 -
F2 -
F3 -
F4 -
F5 -
F6 -
F7 -
F8 -
F9 - Select Host
Select Host: ......
F1 - Host 1 F2 - Host 2
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Queuing Mode
128 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.5.12 Queuing Mode
In some applications, queuing mode can decrease the computer lock time. In queuing
mode, the host computer may send several pages to a 7535 without waiting for
a response. These pages are stored in a queue within the 7535 hand-held. The
operator completes the entries on the first page and then, presses a function key.
The 7535 simultaneously transmits to the host and displays the next page in the
queue. The computer does not lock, allowing the operator to enter data on the next
page immediately. This continues as long as there are pages in the queue.
Queuing mode is used for repetitive tasks, and the queued screens look identical.
The 7535 displays a “Next” message indicating that a new page is on the display.
“Next” messages also contain information about radio communications: “NEXT-B”
indicates that the 7535 has data to transmit to the base station. “NEXT-H”
indicates that the base station has acknowledged a transmission. Unlike lock
messages, “Next” messages do not lock the keyboard. Keying is allowed while
“Next” messages are displayed.
While queuing mode may improve apparent response time, it can present difficulties
to hosts that are operating in real time. It should only be used after careful
consideration of the host environment. The 7535 must be configured for queuing
mode (see the “Queuing” parameter on page 183). Additional information on
queuing can be found in the TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) Manual.
6.6 ANSI Emulation
The Psion Teklogix 7535 in ANSI mode operates like most other ANSI terminals.
This means software that supports ANSI terminals requires little or no changes.
6.6.1 Configuration
To configure the 7535 for ANSI mode, the “Name” and “Type” of session – in this
case, ANSI – must be specified in the Applications menu. This menu is described in
the section titled, “Applications” on page 160.
Next, a unique number must be assigned using the “Terminal #” parameter. This
number should be unique across the entire system – that is, each 7535 and each
application session in each 7535 across your system must have a unique number
assigned. This parameter is described in the section titled “ANSI Settings” on
page 161.
Once the 7535 is configured, an ANSI operation can be selected from the startup
“Display Menu”.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 129
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Sending Data To The Host
6.6.2 Sending Data To The Host
7535 hand-helds running ANSI sessions transmit characters to the host as soon as
they are typed. The 7535 provides parameters that determine when the computer
transmits characters to the host.
The 7535 can be configured to transmit after a number of characters are typed
in (the “Xmit Count” parameter) or after some time has elapsed (the “Xmit Wait”
parameter), or both. This reduces overhead on the radio link and improves response
time. See page 167 for more information about these parameters.
You can also determine whether the 7535 transmits immediately after the
<ENTER> key, an arrow key, or a function key is pressed.
The 7535 computer also responds immediately to the device attribute requests
“CSIc”, “CSI0c” and “ESCZ”.
Note: For a more detailed description of the parameter settings for ANSI,
refer to “ANSI Settings” on page 161.
6.6.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys
The Psion Teklogix keyboard differs from most ANSI terminals. Table 6.3 maps the
equivalent VT220 keys.
Psion Teklogix Key Equivalent VT220 Key
<UP> arrow Up arrow
<DOWN> arrow Down arrow
<RIGHT> arrow Right arrow
<LEFT> arrow Left arrow
<F1>-<F4> PF1-PF4
<F5> None
<F6>-<F10> F6-F10
<F11> F11 (ESC)
<F12> F12 (BS)
<F13> F13 (LF)
<F14> F14
<F15> Help
<F16> Do
<F17>-<F20> F17-F20
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Block Mode (Local Editing)
130 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Table 6.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys
6.6.4 Block Mode (Local Editing)
The Psion Teklogix 7535s support “block mode” (or Local Editing). Application
programs must be specifically written to support this mode. For software that
supports this mode, the keys shown in Table 6.4 have special meaning.
Table 6.4 Function Of Keys In Block Mode
<F21> Find
<F22> Insert Here
<F23> Remove
<F24> Select
<F25> Previous Screen
<F26> Next Screen
<F27>-<F36> None
Key Function
<ENTER> Starts transmission of data.
Function keys Start transmission of data.
Arrow keys Move cursor to the next unprotected position in the
appropriate direction.
<SHIFT> <RIGHT> arrow Moves the cursor to the next unprotected area.
<SHIFT> <LEFT> arrow Moves the cursor to the previous unprotected area.
<DEL> Deletes the character to the left of the cursor, and moves
cursor one position to the left.
<CLR> Erases the data in an area and moves the cursor to the
first position in the area.
Psion Teklogix Key Equivalent VT220 Key
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 131
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Working With Sessions
6.6.5 Working With Sessions
Important: Use only lowercase letters when entering commands
at the “TCP >” prompt.
6.6.5.1 Establishing A New Session
• Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a.
At the TCP> prompt:
• Type tel in lowercase letters followed by the Host Name or IP address.
• Press <ENTER>.
• Log in as usual to begin working with the new session.
6.6.5.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions
To list the current sessions:
• Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a.
At the TCP> prompt:
• Type sess in lowercase letters, and press <ENTER>.
To move to another session:
• At the TCP> prompt, type sess in lowercase letters followed by the session
number to which you want to move.
e.g., Type sess 2 to move to session 2.
• Press <ENTER>.
6.6.5.3 Closing A Session
To close a session:
• Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a.
• At the TCP> prompt, type cl in lowercase letters followed by the session
number you want to close.
e.g., Type cl 2 to close session 2.
• Press <ENTER>.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Printing A Screen
132 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.6.5.4 Printing A Screen
To print each line of a screen with a CR/LF between each line:
• Press <CTRL>, and type p.
The screen will be printed using the port configured as “Print”.
6.6.5.5 Smart Echo – Disabling
In some circumstances – like entering a password – you many want to temporarily
disable “smart echo”, disguising the characters you type with ‘.’ (periods).
• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <P>, and type a ‘.’ (period).
• Type the necessary information using the keyboard, and then press
<ENTER> to return to “smart echo mode.
6.7 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu
The values assigned to Tekterm parameters can be viewed and adjusted to optimize
communication at the site in which a 7535 is operating. While some parameters are
accessible through the “Parameter Manager”, others can be adjusted through the
Windows CE Control Panel. This section provides a description of all parameters and
how to adjust them.
• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <0> (zero) to work with the ‘Display’ menu.
From this startup menu, you can launch the “Parameters” menu along with TESS
and/or ANSI sessions.
Note: Aside from the ‘Parameters’ menu, all other applications listed in the
‘Display Menu’ must be created in the ‘Applications’ menu. Refer to
“Applications” on page 160 for details.
To launch an application, either type the letter to the left of the application you want
to use, or tap the stylus on the item.
A Parameters
B TESS
C ANSI
01 Display Menu
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 133
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Working With Menus
For example, to display the “Parameters” menu:
• Type the letter a,or
• Tap the stylus on the “Parameters” item.
Note: To return to the ‘Display Menu’, press <F2> – the ‘Previous’ key.
6.8 Working With Menus
The 7535 offers two ways to navigate menus and choose values – you can either use
the keyboard or, if your unit is equipped with a touchscreen, you can select items
by tapping a stylus on the screen.
There are four types of parameters: numeric, Y/N, alpha and string entry. Some
menus have sub-menus attached to them and others utilize a Control Panel dialogue box
to make adjustments.
Important: Depending on the method you use when working with menus,
review either “Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through
Menus” on page 133 or “Using The Touchscreen To Navigate
Through Menus” on page 137.
6.8.1 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus
• Press the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys to move the cursor up and down
the current menu.
The currently selected parameter name will be displayed in reverse video.
6.8.1.1 Sub-Menus
The “»” character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has
a sub-menu.
Displaying Sub-Menus
To display a sub-menu:
• Use the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys to position the cursor on the
menu item with the sub-menu you want to display.
• Press <F1> – the “NEXT” menu function key.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Numeric Parameters
134 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Returning To The Previous Menu
• Press <F2> – the “PREV” function key, or
• Press <ESC>.
6.8.1.2 Numeric Parameters
Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video. To increment or decrement
a number:
• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys, or
• Type the desired number in the field. Negative values are entered by typing
a “-” (minus) sign and then the number.
• Press <ENTER>.
Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it – for example,
a preset range of 1 through 10. If you attempt to enter a number which either
exceeds 10 or falls below 1, the incorrect value will be rejected – the original value
for this parameter, if any, will be displayed.
6.8.1.3 Y/N Parameters
Y/N parameters can only be enabled (Y) or disabled (N). To enable or disable
a Y/N parameter:
• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key once,or
• Type y to enable or n to disable the parameter.
Some Y/N parameters have sub-menus. For these parameters, a double right
arrow (») appears next to the “Y” or “N”.
6.8.1.4 Alpha Parameters
Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter. The allowable
values for alpha parameters consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or
words. To cycle through the set:
• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 135
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
String Entry Parameters
6.8.1.5 String Entry Parameters
Important: For detailed information about using string entry fields to
program macro keys, refer to “Macros” on page 145.
A sequence or string of characters can be entered in this type of parameter. When a
string entry parameter contains data, it is displayed in reverse video. (Empty fields
are not displayed in reverse video.) The methods that can be used to enter
information in string entry parameters are described in this section.
In string entry parameters, the <UP> arrow, <DOWN> arrow, <ENTER> and
<BKSP> keys have the following functions:
• The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields
in the direction of the arrow.
• <ENTER> completes the entry field.
• <BKSP> deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
• <DEL> (key combination <BLUE> <BKSP>) clears the entire field.
Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys
Important: Make sure the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> keys are turned off!
By pressing either the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key, you can cycle through
a set of printable characters not directly accessible from the keyboard.
• Press the <RIGHT> arrow to display the next character in this sequence,
and the <LEFT> arrow to display the previous one.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
String Entry Parameters
136 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Adding Additional ASCII Characters
When you’ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same
field, the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character. Normally,
pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key moves the cursor to the right, but in a string entry
field, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key cycles through the available ASCII
characters instead. If you’ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to
add another one in the field, you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor
to the right.
To add another ASCII character in the string entry field, next to the one you’ve
already chosen:
• Type a numeric character – for example, type the number 7.
• Next, press the <BKSP> key.
The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character.
• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the ASCII
characters, and select another character.
Entering Information In A String Entry Field
In addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter,
you can also type text in a string entry field.
• Type the required text in the string entry field – including letters, numbers
and symbols.
• Press <ENTER> to save the text.
Entering Unicode Values
Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium. To enter a Unicode™ value for
one-time use:
• Press and hold down the <ALT> key while typing a four digit decimal value
that represents the Unicode™ character you want to display.
• Release the <ALT> key.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 137
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus
Important: If you have a set of Unicode™ values that you use frequently, you
may want to create and save them in a pop-up window so that you
can access them whenever necessary. Refer to “Custom Charac-
ters (Unicode™)” on page 157 for details.
6.8.2 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus
6.8.2.1 Sub-Menus
The “»” character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has
a sub-menu.
Displaying Sub-Menus
To display a sub-menu:
• Tap the stylus on the menu item with the sub-menu you want
to display.
Returning To The Previous Menu
• If the softkey labels are visible at the bottom of the screen, tap the stylus on
the “PREV” (previous) softkey label.
• If the softkey labels are not visible, you’ll have to press <F2> – the “PREV”
function key.
6.8.2.2 Numeric Parameters
Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video.
•To decrease the numeric value, tap the stylus on the left side of the number.
•To increase the numeric value, tap the stylus on the right side of the
number.
Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it – for example,
a preset range of 1 through 10. If you attempt to enter a number which either
exceeds 10 or falls below 1, the incorrect value will be rejected – the original value
for this parameter, if any, will be displayed.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Y/N Parameters
138 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.8.2.3 Y/N Parameters
Y/N parameters can only be enabled (Y) or disabled (N). To enable or disable
a Y/N parameter:
• Tap the stylus on the Y/N value – the value will toggle between “Y”
and “N”.
Some Y/N parameters have sub-menus. For these parameters, a double right
arrow (») appears next to the “Y” or “N”.
• Tap the stylus on the sub-menu arrow (») to display the sub-menu.
6.8.2.4 Alpha Parameters
Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter. The allowable
values for this type of parameter consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters
or words. To cycle through the set:
• Tap the stylus on the alpha field to cycle through the options.
6.8.2.5 String Entry Parameters
You’ll need to use the keyboard to enter values in string entry fields. Refer to “String
Entry Parameters” on page 135 for details.
6.8.3 Saving Changes To Parameters
Whenever a parameter value is altered, the new value must be saved. To do this:
• Press <F4> – the “SAVE” key.
If you are using a touchscreen:
• Tap the stylus on the “SAVE” softkey label.
• If the softkey labels are not visible, you’ll have to press <F4> – the “SAVE”
function key.
If a parameter value is changed and the menu exited before the change is saved, a
dialogue box appears asking whether or not the operator wants to save the changes.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 139
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Retrieving Default Parameter Values
6.8.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values
Important: When <F3> – the DEFAULT key – is pressed, all parameter
values revert to the factory defaults, including those values that
you’ve changed and saved.
• Press <F3> – the “DEFAULT” function key, or tap the stylus on the
“DEFAULT” softkey label – to reinstate the default parameter values.
• Press <F4> – the “SAVE” function key, or tap the stylus on the “SAVE”
softkey label – to save the changes.
• Reset the 7535. See "Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held Computer" in the next
section.
6.9 Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held Computer
Some parameter adjustments require that the 7535 be reset before the changes can
take effect. To reset the 7535:
• Press and hold down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key simulta-
neously for a minimum of six seconds.
A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit. All RAM memory contents are lost.
The contents of the flash memory and memory card are preserved. When the 7535 is
reset, the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft® Windows® CE.net
splash screen before displaying the startup desktop.
6.10 The Parameters Menu
• At the ‘Display’ menu, type ato display the Parameters menu.
The “Parameters” menu allows you to adjust the screen contrast and select a security
level. With a Supervisory or Teklogix password, you can also access the parameters
listed in the “More Parameters” sub-menu.
More Parameters » see page 141
Security User see page 140
Display » see page 140
01 Parameters Range
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Security Settings
140 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.10.1 Security Settings
In order to access the “More Parameters” sub-menus, the “Security” parameter must
be set to either a Supervisor or a Teklogix level password. The default security level
is User.
• Position the cursor on “Security”, and press the <RIGHT> arrow key to
display the Supervisor option.
• Press <ENTER>.
A Password screen is displayed.
• Type the supervisory level password – it is set at the factory to 123456.
• Press <ENTER>.
Changing A Password
Important: “Sup. Password” on page 152 describes how to change a supervi-
sory level password and how to change “User” options.
6.11 Display Options
The ‘Display’ sub-menu is used to adjust your unit’s display properties.
• Press <F1> to access the ‘Display’ sub-menu.
More Parameters » see page 141
Security User see text
Display » see text
01 Parameters Range
. . . . . .
Password
Backlight Ctrl Panel » see text
02 Range
Display
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 141
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
More Parameters
The Display Properties dialogue box is displayed where you can adjust the appearance,
backlight and contrast of your 7535 display.
Figure 6.5 Display Properties
Important: ‘Display Properties’ dialogue box options are described in detail
beginning on page 77.
6.12 More Parameters
The “More Parameters” sub-menus contain the Tekterm parameters and can only be
accessed with the proper security password – either a Supervisory or a Teklogix
password. (Refer to “Security Settings” on page 140 for details.)
Warning: Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of
how they operate. Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase
response time or cause communication difficulties. Generally,
parameters are configured for each site during installation.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Radio Parameters
142 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• At the startup ‘Display’ menu, type ‘a’ to display the ‘Parameters’ menu.
• To open the ‘More Parameters’ menu, press <F1>.
6.13 Radio Parameters
Important: Radio parameters should not be changed from their factory
settings without a clear understanding of your system.
The 7535 is equipped with an Intel 802.11b radio.
• Press <F1> to display the ‘Radio’ sub-menu.
• Press <F1> again to access the ‘802.11’ sub-menu.
More Parameters » see page 141
Security Supervisor see page 140
Display » see page 140
01 Parameters Range
Radio »
System »
Scanner Ctrl Panel »
View Manager »
Applications »
Ports »
Network »
02 Parameters
802.11 »
03 Radio
802.IQ v1 N »
CIS Data »
04 802.11 DS SS
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 143
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Radio Parameters
• Press <F1> to display ‘802.IQ v1’ parameters.
802.IQ v1
When 802.IQ v1 is set to “Y”, the attached sub-menu of parameters is enabled.
Auto Radio Addr
If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), a request is sent to the network controller to
assign a radio address to the hand-held computer radio.
If “Auto Radio Addr” is set to “N”, the value entered in the “Radio Address”
parameter is used. (Refer to "Radio Address" in this section for details about
manually assigned radio addresses.)
Important: Ensure that all 7535s grouped in the system use the same
addressing process – that is, if you choose to use automatic
radio addressing, use this addressing process for all units
operating in the same system. If you choose to assign radio
addresses manually using the “Radio Address” parameter, use
this process for all units in the same system.
Radio Address
The value entered in the “Radio address” parameter is used to identify the
7535 over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned
for each 7535 hand-held computer.
Initial RTT (Round Trip Time)
Round trip time is the elapsed time between a hand-held computer transmission and
an access point acknowledgement. Each 7535 continuously adjusts the acceptable
round trip time, calculating the average elapsed time over a number of transmis-
sions. If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip
time calculated, the computer will resend the transmission.
Auto Radio Addr Y Y/N
Radio Address 0 1-3840
Initial RTT 0 0-1000
Protocol Type 2457 1501-65535
Range
802.IQ v1
05
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Radio Parameters
144 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Because 7535s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of
transmissions, a starting point or “Initial Round Trip Time” is required. The com-
puter uses the time assigned to the “Initial RTT” parameter as a starting value for
round trip calculations. Once the 7535 begins transmitting and receiving data, this
value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmis-
sions and acknowledgements.
Protocol Type
“Protocol Type” is used to identify the Ethernet packet frame type sent by the 7535.
The default value – 2457 – assigned to this parameter identifies the Teklogix 802.IQ
protocol Ethernet packet frame types.
The “Protocol Type ID” should only be altered if the default value is already being
used to specify another application Ethernet frame type.
Important: If you change the value assigned to “Protocol Type ID”, ensure
that all 7535s and 9150s in your system use the same number.
CIS Data
This sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data, including the
version and the unit hardware address.
Version 00.24
00:03:64:91:52:cd
CIS Data0505
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 145
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
System Parameters
6.14 System Parameters
6.14.1 Keyboard
6.14.1.1 Macros
A macro has 20 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be
programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of
executable keys like <ENTER>, <DEL>, function keys and arrow keys. They may
also be used to provide characters not normally accessed from the keyboard.
The methods used to create macros are described in this section.
Displaying The Macros Menu
Macros are programmed from within the “Macros” sub-menu.
• From the “Display Menu”, type the letter a to display the “Parameters”
menu.
• In the “Parameters” menu, highlight “System”, and press <F1>.
Keyboard »
Audio »
Pwr Mgmt Ctrl Panel »
Security »
03 System
Macros »
Indicators Y
Softkeys Y
Ctrl Panel »
Keyboard
04
Radio »
System »
Scanner Ctrl Panel»
View Manager »
Applications »
Ports »
Network »
02 Parameters
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Macros
146 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• In the “System” sub-menu, position the cursor on “Keyboard”,
and press <F1>.
• With the cursor resting on “Macros”, press <F1>.
.
Programming Macros
You can program up to 12 macro keys on a 58-key keyboard and 6 macro keys on a
36-key keyboard.
• Position the cursor in the macro field corresponding to the macro key to
which you want to assign macros – M1 corresponds to macro key <M1>,
M2 corresponds to macro key <M2>, and so on.
Once the cursor is in a macro field, you have a number of options when creating a
macro. You can type text and numbers, choose from a set of ASCII characters and
program the function of special keys into a macro.
Keyboard » see text
Audio » see text
Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel » see text
Security » see text
System
03 Range
Macros » see text
Indicators Y Y/N
Softkeys Y Y/N
Ctrl Panel » see text
Range
Keyboard
04
M1
•
•
•
M12
Macros
05
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 147
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Macros
In macros, the <UP> arrow, <DOWN> arrow, <ENTER> and <DEL> keys have the
following functions:
• Pressing the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys move the cursor between
entry fields.
• Pressing the <ENTER> key once moves the cursor to the first position in
the entry field; pressing <ENTER> a second time completes the entry field,
exits the sub-menu and returns the cursor to the “parent” or previous menu.
• The <BKSP> key deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
• The <DEL> key – <BLUE> <BKSP> – clears the entire field. If the last
character in a field is deleted, the previous contents, if any, reappear.
Entering Text In A String Entry Field
In addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter,
you can also type text in a string entry field.
• Type the required text in the string entry field – including letters, numbers
and symbols.
• Press <ENTER> to save the text.
Entering Unicode™ Values
Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium. To enter a Unicode™ value:
• Press and hold down the <ALT> key while typing a four digit decimal value
that represents the Unicode™ character you want to display.
• Release the <ALT> key.
Choosing An ASCII Character
Important: Make sure the <CTRL>, <ALT> and <CAPS> keys are turned
off!
By pressing either the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key, you can cycle through a set
of printable characters. The sample below is a set of ASCII characters accessible
from within a macro field: ? ’ , < > [ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~ =
• Press the <RIGHT> arrow to display the next character in this sequence,
and the <LEFT> arrow to display the previous one.
Adding Additional ASCII Characters
When you’ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same
field, the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character. Normally,
pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key moves the cursor to the right, but in a string entry
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Indicators
148 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
field, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key cycles through the available ASCII
characters instead. If you’ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to
add another one in the field, you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor
to the right.
To add another ASCII character in the string entry field, next to the one you’ve
already chosen:
• Type a numeric character – for example, type the number 7.
• Next, press the <BKSP> key
The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character.
• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the ASCII
characters, and select another character.
Programming Special Keys Into Macros
Macros can contain the function of a subset of computer keys. The keys that can be
programmed into macros include: <ENTER>, <BKSP> and <DEL> (<BLUE>-
<BKSP>), function keys and arrow keys. To program the function of a key:
• Position the cursor in the macro field corresponding to the macro key you
want to program – for example, the field labelled M1 represents macro key
<M1>, and so on.
• Press <F5> – the Literal function key. (Alternatively, you can press
<CTRL> <ALT> and then, type the letter l (el) (l represents “literal”).
• Press the key you wish to add to the macro.
For example: To execute the function of the <ENTER> key in a macro,
press <F5> <ENTER>.
6.14.1.2 Indicators
When the “Indicators” parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), onscreen indicators are
displayed to indicate the operating condition of the 7535. Refer to “Onscreen
Indicators” on page 47 for a list of possible indicators.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 149
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Softkeys
6.14.1.3 Softkeys
Enabling (setting to “Y”) the “Softkeys” parameter displays softkey labels at the
bottom of the screen to indicate the function of each softkey. To block the display of
softkey labels, set this parameter to “N”.
Softkeys are function keys which are programmed to execute specific actions when
pressed. Refer to Table 6.1 on page 114 for a list of softkey labels.
6.14.1.4 Cntrl Panel
This menu item displays the Keyboard Properties dialogue box in which you can adjust
the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour
of the <BLUE> and <ORANGE> keys.
Figure 6.6 Keyboard Properties
Important: Refer to “Keyboard Properties” on page 80 for details about this
dialogue box.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Audio
150 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.14.2 Audio
Beep Tone And Beep Time
These parameters regulate the frequency and duration of beeps emitted in a TESS or
ANSI session when one of the following is received at the 7535: an advisory, a hey
you or a bell character. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
Error Tone And Error Time
These parameters determine the frequency and duration of each error tone. Tone is
measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
Scan Tone 1 And Scan Time 1
“Scan tone 1” and “Scan time 1” determine the frequency and duration of the first
beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
Scan Tone 2 And Scan Time 2
“Scan tone 2” and “Scan time 2” determine the frequency and duration of the
second beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
Scan Tone 3 And Scan Time 3
“Scan tone 3” and “Scan time 3” determine the frequency and duration of the third
beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
Beep tone 3000 800-3000
Beep time 250 0-2000
Error tone 1000 800-3000
Error time 1000 0-2000
Scan tone 1 1500 800-3000
Scan time 1 150 0-2000
Scan tone 2 2000 800-3000
Scan time 2 150 0-2000
Scan tone 3 2500 800-3000
Scan time 3 150 0-2000
Range
Audio
04
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 151
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Power Mgmt
6.14.3 Power Mgmt
This menu item displays the Power Properties dialogue box that displays the battery
capacity of the 7535 and allows you to manage battery use.
Figure 6.7 Power Properties Dialogue Box
Important: Refer to “Power Management Properties” on page 83 for details
about this dialogue box.
6.14.4 Security
6.14.4.1 Default Mode
The value assigned to this parameter determines the operator’s level of access to
7535 parameters. The values include User,Supervisor and Teklogix. “Default mode”
is set to User.
At User level, the operator is restricted to a small group of parameters. These are
listed in the “User” sub-menu. Refer to “User Level Options” on page 152 for
details. Choosing Supervisor allows access to all the parameters available in the
7535.
Default mode User Supervisor, Teklogix
User » see text
Sup. password ###### see text
Security
04 Range
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
User Level Options
152 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
The Teklogix level password is only available to Psion Teklogix personnel.
• Press the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key to select the appropriate security
level – User, Supervisor or Teklogix.
6.14.4.2 User Level Options
Important: Only Supervisor and Teklogix level passwords can change the
values of the User options.
Screen Switch
When set to “Y”, the operator can use the “Split screen” parameter to toggle
between screens when multiple applications are running on the 7535. Refer to “Split
Screen” on page 155 for details about using this function.
Font Chg
When “Font Chg” is set to “Y”, operators at the User level can change the font size
of their 7535s.
6.14.4.3 Sup. Password
Note: Only a Supervisor or Teklogix level password can change the Supervisor
password.
The supervisory password is set at the factory to 123456. You should change the
default password to better protect the 7535 settings. When you’ve changed the
password, write down the new password and file it in a secure place. If the
password is lost, the parameters can only be changed by Psion Teklogix personnel.
Screen switch Y Y/N
View Mode Y Y/N
Font Chg Y Y/N
User
05 Range
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 153
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scanner Control Panel
Your password can have up to six alphanumeric characters. To change your
password:
• Position the cursor on “Sup. password” and type a new value in the string
entry field.
• When you’ve completed the change, press <ENTER> and then, press <F4>
– the SAVE function key – to save your change.
Important: When you change your password, set all the 7535s to the same
password.
6.15 Scanner Control Panel
This menu item displays a Scanner Properties dialogue box in which you can set up the
particulars of your unit’s scanner performance, choose the bar codes which will be
decoded, and so on.
Figure 6.8 Scanner Properties Dialogue Box
Important: Refer to "Scanner Properties" beginning on page 86 for details
about setting up your scanner.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
View Manager
154 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.16 View Manager
Display Shift
If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the display in application screens shifts so
that there are no blank columns on the left-most side of the display.
Block Cursor
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor is presented as a flashing
block. When “Block Cursor” is set to “N”, the cursor is presented as a flashing
underline character.
Use increment
When “Use increment” is enabled (set to “Y”) and the cursor is moved off the
display, the screen contents shift by the values specified in the “X-increment” and
“Y-increment” parameters.
X-increment
This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor
moves out of view. The value assigned here doesn’t take effect until “Use
Increment” is set to “Y”.
Y-increment
This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor
moves out of view. The value assigned here doesn’t take effect until “Use
Increment” is set to “Y”.
Display Shift YY/N
Block Cursor Y Y/N
Use Increment N Y/N
X-increment 5 1..40
Y-increment 5 1..12
Split Screen » see text
Custom Chars » see text
Font Override N» see text
Default Colours » see text
View Manager
Range
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 155
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Split Screen
6.16.1 Split Screen
This parameter allows you to split the display view so that more than one
application screen can be displayed at the same time. The split screen parameters,
“Type” and “View IDs”, are used to tailor the screen view for your needs.
Type And View IDs
The “Type” parameter determines how a screen will be split. The 7535 supports up
to four application screens. The “View IDs” parameter determines which
application screens will be displayed in each pane of the split screen. “Moving
Between Split Screens” on page 156 describes how to move the cursor from one
split screen to the next.
6.16.1.1 Splitting And Displaying Screens
Before splitting the screen, you need to determine which applications should appear
in each pane of the split screen. The available applications are listed in the main
“Display Menu”. Each application listed in the “Display Menu” is preceded by a
letter – for example, Parameters is preceded by an A. This letter is used in the
“View IDs” string entry field to fix each pane of a split screen to a corresponding
application.
If you need to display the startup “Display Menu”:
• Press <CTRL> <ALT><0>.
To split a screen:
• With the cursor on the “Type” parameter, use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT>
arrow key to scroll through the types of split screens available.
The vertical and horizontal lines displayed at the “Type” parameter indicate how the
screen will be split – for example, in the sample screen on page 157, the vertical
lines indicate the screen will be vertically split into two segments. The screen can
also be split horizontally 3 ways or 4 ways.
Type 2 Way |||
View IDs A
04 Split screen
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Moving Between Split Screens
156 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Once you’ve indicated how you want to split the screen in the “Type” parameter:
• Use the <DOWN> arrow key to move the cursor to the “View IDs”
parameter.
• For each application you want to display, type the letter corresponding to
the application.
For example, suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical
segments with the Parameters menu in the left pane of the screen and
aTESS session in the right pane. In the “Display Menu”, the letter A
represents “Parameters” and B represents “TESS”. The “Type” and
“View ID” values would be represented as follows:
• Press <ENTER>.
To display the split screen on the 7535:
• Press <CTRL> <DOWN> arrow.
6.16.1.2 Moving Between Split Screens
To move the cursor from one pane in a split screen to the next:
• Press <CTRL> <RIGHT> or <LEFT>. The cursor moves in order from the
left-most pane to the right and from the top-most pane to the bottom.
6.16.1.3 Toggling Between Full & Split Screens
To toggle between a split and full screen format:
• Press <CTRL> <DOWN> arrow.
The application displayed when toggling from a split to a full screen format is
determined by the cursor location in the split screen. For example, if the cursor
is in the pane of a split screen in which the TESS application is displayed and
<CTRL> <DOWN> is pressed to display a full screen, the TESS application will be
displayed in the full screen.
Type 2 Way |||
View IDs AB
04 Split screen
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 157
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card
6.16.1.4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card
When a screen is split, the application displayed in each pane is fixed in the “View
IDs” parameter. Using an asterisk * in the “View IDs” parameter indicates that a
particular pane in the split screen is not fixed to any particular application and can be
changed as required.
For example, suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with
the left pane containing the “Parameters” menu and the right pane containing no
fixed application. The “Type” and “View IDs” parameters would be completed as
follows:
To change the application displayed in the pane with no fixed application:
• If the cursor is not currently in the pane, press <CTRL> <RIGHT> or
<LEFT> arrow to move the cursor into the appropriate screen.
• Press <CTRL> <ALT><0> to display the startup “Display Menu”.
• Type the letter corresponding to the new application you want to display.
6.16.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™)
The “Custom Characters” parameter allows you to create Unicode™ characters not
available directly from the keyboard, including accented characters. Unicode is a
trademark of The Unicode Consortium. You can create up to 20 Unicode™
characters that will be stored in a pop-up menu accessible from any application.
6.16.2.1 Creating A Unicode™ Character
Note: You can create a Unicode™ character by pressing and holding down
the <ALT> while typing the decimal value that represents the Unicode™
character you want to use. However, you will need to press <ALT> and
retype the decimal value each time you want to use the special character.
The advantage to creating special characters using the “Custom Chars”
parameters is that the characters you create in the customer characters
table are saved in a pop-up window that is accessible from any application.
• In the Parameters menu, highlight “View Manager” and press <F1>.
Type 2 Way |||
View IDs A*
04 Split screen
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window
158 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• Highlight “Custom Chars”, and press <F1> to display the custom
characters table.
• Position the cursor on the Fonts at the top of the table.
• Press the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow keys until the character set you want
to use is displayed.
You can create up to 20 Unicode™ characters in the custom characters table.
To create a Unicode™ value:
• Replace the 0000 value with a hex value that represents the Unicode™
character you want to use.
• Press the <DOWN> arrow key to accept the value and move the cursor to
the next field.
When you have finished creating the Unicode™ characters you want to use:
• Press <F4> to save your changes.
• Reset the 7535 – press and hold down the <ENTER> and <BLUE> key
simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.
6.16.2.2 Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window
The Unicode™ values you create are stored in a pop-up window that you can access
from any application.
To display the pop-up window within any application:
• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <A>.
Note: Unicode™ characters that cannot be displayed on your screen with the
font you are currently using are displayed as rectangles in the pop-up
window. (See the sample menu on page 159.) However, the actual Uni-
code™ value you created will be sent to the host.
Font Small
U+ 0000
U+ 0000
•
•
•
04 Custom Chars
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 159
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window
• Use the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key to position the cursor on the
Unicode™ value you want to use, and press <ENTER>.
To close the pop-up menu when you’re done:
• Press the <ESC> key.
Font Override
This parameter is used to redefine the font to which 5 different font codes refer.
Select item with arrow keys.
Press ENTER when done.
Press ESC to cancel.
Font Code 0
... is font 18x32
Font Code 1
... is font 18x32
Font Code 2
... is font 10x26
Font Code 3
... is font 18x32
Font Code 4
... is font 8x20
Font Override
04
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Applications
160 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Default Colours
Foreground And Background
This menu is used to select the foreground and background colours used within
Tekterm. If an unreadable combination is assigned – the foreground and background
have the same value – the foreground colour will be inverted.
The allowable values are: Red,Green,Yellow,Blue,Magenta,Cyan,White
and Black.
Note: The 7535 must be reset – press and hold down the <BLUE> and
<ENTER> keys for a minimum of six seconds – in order for the new
colour assignments to take affect.
6.17 Applications
“TESS” and “ANSI” applications require unique names so that several different
sessions of “TESS” and “ANSI” can operate simultaneously. 7535s can support up
to 8 sessions at one time.
Important: These applications will become active only after the changes
made in the Application screen are saved by pressing <F4> –
the SAVE key.
Foreground Black see text
Background White see text
04 Default Colours
Range
Type1 #1 ANSI None, ANSI,TESS
Title1 #1 parts see text
Settings 1 » see text
.
.
.
Type1 #8 None
Title1 #8
Settings 8 »
Applications Range
03
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 161
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
ANSI Settings
Type And Title
Up to eight applications can be entered in this parameter. The “Type #” field
indicates the type of session you will be running. The “Title #” parameter should be
completed with a name that is meaningful to the operator.
• The available options for the “Type #” field are TESS, ANSI and None.
Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the options.
• The “Title #” field needs a name that is meaningful to the operator. In addi-
tion, “TESS” and “ANSI” applications require unique titles so that several
different sessions of “TESS” and “ANSI” can operate simultaneously.
These titles will appear in startup “Display Menu”. Each session will have
its own set of parameters.
• To display the “Settings” menu for your application, position the cursor
on “Settings”, and press <F1> – the NEXT key.
Note: Before you can access the “Settings” menu, you must first complete the
“Name” and “Type” fields.
6.17.1 ANSI Settings
Each session you create has its own “Settings” parameters. Additional ANSI
information is documented in “ANSI Emulation” on page 128.
Auto Term # N» see text
Terminal # 1 1..1024
Host Conn » see text
Screen » see text
Xmit Modes » see text
Kbd Modes » see text
Edit Modes » see text
Serial » see text
Host Char Set » see text
Anchor View N» see text
Ansi Range
04
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Host Conn
162 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Auto Term#
Note: Refer to “Group” on page 162 for additional instructions.
When this parameter is set to “Y”, a unique number is assigned for the current
ANSI session. If “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, any value assigned to the “Terminal #”
parameter is ignored.
Note: “Auto Term#” is available when 802.IQv2 is assigned to the “Host
Conn” parameter (page 162) or when 802.IQv1 is enabled in the Radio
Menu (see “802.IQ v1” on page 143).
Group
When “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, the ‘Group’ parameter is used to identify the
group or pool of numbers from which an auto-address is chosen.
Terminal #
For every application session you create, the “Terminal #” assigned must be non-
zero and unique. This parameter defines the number for the ANSI session and
uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 7535.
Other applications running in the 7535, such as a TESS session or another ANSI
session must each have a different number. In addition, each Psion Teklogix 7535
using the radio link must have a unique number.
6.17.1.1 Host Conn
Conn Type
For ANSI applications, this parameter allows you to choose one of the following
types of connections: 802.IQv2, 9010t (TCP Direct) or Telnet. Keep in
mind that choosing Telnet allows the 7535 to communicate directly with
the host.
Group 1 1-5
Range
Auto Term#
Conn Type Telnet Telnet 9010t 802.IQv2
Settings » see text
Range
Host Conn
05
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 163
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Screen
Settings
Note: The “Settings” sub-menu is not available when 802.IQv2 is selected as
the “Conn Type”.
Host
This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.###
Port
“Port” specifies the 9010t or Telnet port number.
6.17.1.2 Screen
# of Pages
This parameter defines how many pages are accessible to application programs. The
ANSI control functions – Next Page (NP) and Previous page (PP) – are used to
select another page. These pages are independent of each other so that if lines of text
scroll off a page, the other pages are unaffected.
There is no error indication from the hand-held computer if the memory required by
the selected number and size of pages exceeds the memory available in the
computer.
Host see text
Port 9999 0-9999
Range
Settings
06
# of Pages 4 0..16
# of Rows 24 4..60
# of Cols 80 80 or 132
Default Font 16x30 see text
80-col. Font 16x30 see text
132-col. Font 16x30 see text
Video » see text
Label F1-F6 » see text
Colour override N » see text
Range
Screen
05
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Screen
164 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
# of Rows
This parameter defines the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer
application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This
page length cannot be smaller than the length of the hand-held’s display. Display
panning is used if the page is longer than the display.
Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.
# of Cols
This parameter defines the logical page width (in characters) used by the host
computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this
width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the display. Display
panning is used if the page is wider than the display.
Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.
Default font
This parameter determines the default font that appears when the 7535 memory is
reset. The allowable values are: 16x30,19x30,19x40,22x15,22x20,22x24,
22x30,22x48,33x30,33x40,33x48,8x15,8x20 (Thai), 9x12 (Arabic),
10x9 (Traditional Chinese), 10x15,11x10 (Korean), 12x24 (Thai), 13x12,
13x15,13x20,14x30,15x21,16x15 (Traditional Chinese), 16x15 (Korean),
16x15 (Simplified Chinese).
• Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the available
options.
80-col. font & 132-col. font
These parameters are used to set the font size on the screen if the default font is not
acceptable. An escape sequence must be sent from the host before a hand-held can
switch to either 80-col.font or 132-col.font.
• Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys to scroll through the size options
for these parameters. The font sizes are listed in “Default Font” above.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 165
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Screen
Video
The possible attributes for these parameters are: “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN”
(underline), “REV” (reverse), and “NONE” (normal).
Bold
This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created
with the “Bold” ANSI attribute.
Blink
This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields
created with the “Blink” ANSI attribute.
Reverse
This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created
with the “Reverse” ANSI attribute.
Underline
This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields
created with the “Underline” ANSI attribute.
Label F1-F6
Note: This menu uses string entry fields. For detailed information about com-
pleting this type of field, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 135.
Bold NONE see text
Blink BLNK see text
Reverse REV see text
Underline ULIN see text
06 Video Range
F1
•
•
•
F6
Label F1-6
06
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Xmit Modes
166 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions
in your application. These keys are identified through softkey labels – reverse video
labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen. These softkey labels can be
reconfigured using the menu attached to the “Label F1-F6” parameter.
To edit a label:
• Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the
Label menu, and type a new name – preferably one that describes
the corresponding key’s function.
Note: Although you can enter up to 9 characters for each softkey label, the text
will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display.
Colour Override
Foreground And Background
When “Colour Override” is set to ‘Y’, the colours chosen in this menu are displayed
in the ANSI sessions. These colour settings will override the “Default Colours” set
from within the “View Manager” menu. Refer to “Default Colours” on page 160 for
details.
The allowable values are: Red,Green,Yellow,Blue,Magenta,Cyan,White
and Black.
6.17.1.3 Xmit Modes
Foreground Black see text
Background White see text
06 Colour Override
Range
Xmit Count 99 0..99
Xmit Wait 1 0..999
Dev Attr [ ? 62;1;2;6c see text
Auto-Answer see text
7 bit Y Y/N
Block Mode » see text
05 Xmit Modes Range
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 167
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Xmit Modes
Xmit Count
This parameter determines how many characters from the keyboard or scanner are
buffered by the 7535 before being transmitted to the host. If 0 (zero) is selected, the
hand-held transmits only according to the “Xmit Wait” parameter. If the ANSI block
mode features are used, this parameter should be set to 99.
Note: If the 7535 is not in local edit mode, the <ENTER>, arrow, <CTRL>,
and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of
the “Xmit Count” parameter setting.
Xmit Wait
This parameter determines the length of time the 7535 collects keystrokes before
transmitting them to the host. This value is specified in increments of one 10th of a
second (i.e., a value of 10 represents 1 second). If 0 (zero) is selected, the computer
transmits only according to the “Xmit Count” parameter.
Note: If the 7535 is not in local edit mode, the <ENTER>, arrow, <CTRL>,
and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of
the “Xmit Wait” parameter setting.
Dev Attr
This string entry parameter specifies a device attribute string. This string can be up
to 16 characters long. The computer sends this string to the host when it receives a
DA or DECID control. The example shown in the “Xmit Modes” screen sample on
page 166 is the device attribute sent to a VAX, identifying the Psion Teklogix hand-
held computer as a VT220 terminal. This parameter may or may not be set,
depending on the requirements of the host computer.
Auto-Answer
This string can be up to 30 characters long and is sent by the 7535 as a reply to
an “ENQ” character from the host. The “Auto-Answer” string is programmable in
the same manner as the keyboard macros. For example, this string can be used to
automatically send the username and password when logging into the host. Refer
to "Macros" beginning on page 145 for additional details about macros.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Xmit Modes
168 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7 bit
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the hand-held computer transmits 8 bit
controls. When enabled (set to “Y”), the hand-held transmits 7 bit controls. This
parameter applies to character mode, block mode, and media copy mode.
Block Mode
All modes in this section affect the data stream sent to the host computer, the serial
port and the console port. These modes apply to the Block mode (Local Editing)
and the Media Copy function, unless otherwise noted. Consult the Teklogix ANSI
Terminal Programmer’s Manual for more information.
Kbd lock
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the 7535 does not lock the keyboard
after a block mode transmission. When enabled (set to “Y”), the keyboard is locked
after a transmission. The application program must unlock the keyboard by resetting
the Keyboard Action Mode (KAM), using the Reset Mode (RM) or Enable Manual
Input (EMI) controls.
Xmit key
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the key that causes the 7535 hand-held
to transmit is not sent to the host as part of the transmitted data. When enabled
(set to “Y”), the key that causes a transmission is sent after the page data has
been sent to the host. This parameter applies only to block mode.
Kbd lock N
Xmit key N
FETM N
GATM N
MATM N
SATM Y
TTM Y
EOL chars
EOB chars
06 Block Mode
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 169
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Xmit Modes
FETM
When the Format Effector Transfer Mode (FETM) parameter is disabled (set to
“N”), Format Effectors are inserted in data sent to the host or included in data when
transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the Format
Effectors are not inserted into the data sent to the host and are not included in the
data transferred to the console or serial ports.
GATM
When the Guarded Area Transfer Mode (GATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”),
only unguarded data is transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or
serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), both guarded and unguarded data can be
transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports.
MATM
When the Multiple Area Transfer Mode (MATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”),
only the selected area containing the cursor can be transmitted to the host or
transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), all selected
areas can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports.
This mode is significant only if the Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) is disabled.
SATM
When the Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”),
the selected areas defined by SSA/ESA and DAQ can be transmitted to the host or
transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the full contents
of the buffer can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports.
TTM
When the Transfer Termination Mode (TTM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the
cursor position determines the end of the string that can be transmitted to the host
or transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor
position is ignored.
EOL chars
This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after
each line in a block transmission. If the parameter is not used, the rules specified in
“Transmitted Data Stream” are used to determine end of line characters.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Kbd Modes
170 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
EOB chars
This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after
each block transmission.
6.17.1.4 Kbd Modes
Arrow mode
This parameter determines whether arrow keys move the cursor within a field or
between fields. When set to “field”, pressing an arrow key causes the cursor to
move to the next field in the direction of the arrow. When set to “cursor”, pressing
the <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys move the cursor within the current field.
Echo Mode
This parameter selects echo mode for the 7535. The available modes are “Local”,
“Host”, and “Smart”.
Local: In this mode, any character entered using the keyboard is displayed
before being sent to the host. Certain keys cause additional action
at the 7535, as shown in Table 6.5 on page 171.
Host: In this mode, the hand-held computer sends all keyboard entries to
the host and displays only data received from the host.
Smart: This mode reduces or eliminates the delay between typing a
character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by
the host computer. The 7535 displays all printable characters on the
Arrow mode cursor cursor, field
Echo mode Smart Smart, Local, Host
BKSP key DEL DEL, BS
PrintScreen key 16 1..255
Xmit Enter Y Y/N
Insert N Y/N
Newline N Y/N
Disable kbd N Y/N
DEC Cursor Keys cursor mode see text
05 Kbd Modes Range
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 171
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Kbd Modes
screen before sending them to the host. The hand-held compares
the characters echoed by the host to the characters placed on the
page and fixes the display if the host echoes are different.
The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25.
Any additional characters are sent to the host but not displayed.
When the 7535 is in insert mode, smart echo is disabled.
Table 6.5 Function Of Special Keys In Local Echo Mode
BKSP key
This parameter determines whether the <BKSP> key acts as a delete key, erasing
the character to the right of the cursor, or a backspace key, erasing the character
to the left of the cursor.
PrtScr key
This parameter determines the “hot-key” for printing the screen contents via the
7535 serial port. The default is <CTRL> P (16).
Key Function
ENTER In newline mode, this key moves the cursor to the first
column of the next line. In line feed mode, this key
moves the cursor to column one of the current line.
CTRL-G (Bell) The 7535 beeps.
CTRL-H (Backspace) The cursor moves back one space.
CTRL-I (Tab) The cursor moves to the next horizontal tab stop.
CTRL-J (Line Feed)
CTRL-L (Form Feed) The cursor moves down one line in the same column.
CTRL-K (Vertical
Tab) The cursor moves down to the next line with a vertical
tab set.
DEL This key deletes the character to the left of the cursor
and moves the cursor to the left by one position.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Kbd Modes
172 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Note: The 7535’s port must be set to “printer” (see“Ports– Tether And Con-
sole” on page 191).
Xmit Enter
The <ENTER> key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the
next field. However, some applications require that the <ENTER> key start a
transmission from the 7535. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes the
<ENTER> key to start a transmission.
Insert
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), it behaves in “replace” mode –
a character entered at the keyboard or received from the host replaces the
character at the cursor position. The cursor then advances one character position.
When enabled (set to “Y”), the character entered at the keyboard or received from
the host is inserted at the cursor position after shifting the characters at and following
the cursor forward one position. The cursor is advanced one position. The extent
of the characters affected by the shift depends on the setting of the “Edit Extent”
parameter (see page 173).
Newline
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), an LF character received from the
host causes the cursor to move down one line in the same column. In addition,
the <ENTER> key transmits a CR. When enabled (set to “Y”), an LF character
received from the host causes the cursor to move to the first column of the next
line. The <ENTER> key transmits both a CR and an LF.
Disable kbd
When this parameter is set to “N”, the keyboard and scanner are enabled.
Setting this parameter to “Y” disables the keyboard and scanner.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 173
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Edit Modes
6.17.1.5 Edit Modes
Auto wrap
If “Auto wrap” is disabled (set to “N”), characters received when the cursor is at the
right edge of the screen replace the previously displayed characters. If “Auto wrap”
is enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor wraps to the next line when the current line is
filled. The display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom margin.
Erasure mode
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), erase functions can only erase
unprotected characters. When enabled (set to “Y”), the erase functions can
erase characters regardless of their protected state.
Tab stop mode
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the setting and clearing of horizontal
tab stops apply to the same horizontal position of all lines on the page. When enabled
(set to ‘Y”), horizontal tab setting and clearing apply only to the current line.
Edit extent
This parameter selects the extent of the display to be affected by the ICH and DCH
controls and received character insertion. The possible values are Line,Area,
Display or Fld. The shifting caused by ICH, DCH and character insertion is
confined to the selected extent.
Disp controls
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), any control codes received from the
host are performed as described. When enabled (set to “Y”), any received control
functions are displayed and are not performed. If any C0 or C1 controls are received
from the host, their standard ANSI mnemonics are displayed in reverse video. Other
characters are displayed as normal characters. This mode can also be set with the Set
Mode (SM) control but can only be reset from the Parameters menu.
Auto wrap N Y/N
Erasure mode N Y/N
Tab stop mode N Y/N
Edit extent Line see text
Disp controls N Y/N
04 Edit Modes Range
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Serial
174 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.17.1.6 Serial
Primary Port & Secondary Port
ANSI print commands (such as ‘MC’ or Media Copy) control the transfer of data to
and from the serial and console ports on the 7535. At the 7535, the value assigned at
the ‘Primary Port’ and ‘Secondary Port’ parameters determines which port the
ANSI print command will identify and use as primary and secondary. The allowable
options are: Any Available, Ist printer, 2nd printer, 3rd printer,
4th printer, 1st Serial, 2nd Serial, 3rd Serial, 4th Serial and
Disabled.
Async In
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the serial (async) port is ready to
receive input at all times.
Start/End
These parameters specify the “start” and “end” characters of input received from
the serial (async) port.
6.17.1.7 Host Char Set
The ‘Host Char Set’ menu allows you to specify a character set in the ‘Lower’ and
‘Upper’ character tables.
Note: When an 8-bit set is selected from the ‘Lower’ character set, the ‘Upper’
character set cannot be changed.
Primary Port Any Available see text
Secondary Port Any Available see text
Async In N Y/N
Start 0 0..255
End 0 0..255
05 Serial Range
Lower VT220 Fren Cdn.
Upper Arabic IR-127
Host Char Set
05
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 175
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Anchor View
To choose ‘Lower’ and ‘Upper character sets:
• Position the cursor on the ‘Lower’ or ‘Upper’ parameter, and press the
<RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to display the character set options.
• Press <F4> to save your selection to memory.
Important: When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed, a
rectangular box is used as a substitute.
6.17.1.8 Anchor View
When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter locks the display at a defined location on
the screen, preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved. The “x origin” and
“y origin” coordinates specify where the screen origin, the upper left corner of the
screen, will be fixed.
x origin and y origin
The “x origin” parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left
corner of the screen will be anchored. The “y origin” parameter is used to specify
the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored.
x origin 1 1..24
y origin 1 1..80
Anchor Range
05
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
TESS Settings
176 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.17.2 TESS Settings
Each session you create has its own “Settings” parameters. Additional TESS
information is documented in “TESS Emulation” on page 120.
Auto Term#
Note: Refer to “Group” on page 176 for additional instructions.
When this parameter is set to “Y”, a unique unit number is assigned for the current
TESS session. If “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, any value assigned to the “Terminal #”
parameter is ignored.
Note: “Auto Term#” is available when 802.IQv2 is assigned to the “Host
Conn” parameter (page 177) or when 802.IQv1 is enabled in the Radio
Menu (see “802.IQ v1” on page 143).
Group
When “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, the ‘Group’ parameter is used to identify the
group or pool of numbers from which an auto-address is chosen.
Terminal #
For every application session you create, the “Terminal #” assigned must be non-
zero and unique. This parameter defines the terminal number for the TESS session
and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 7535.
Auto Term # N»
Terminal # 1 see text
Host Conn » see text
Screen » see text
Characters » see text
Tests » see text
Features » see text
Scanner » see text
Fields » see text
Anchor View N» see text
TESS Range
04
Group 1 1-5
Range
Auto Term#
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 177
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Host Conn.
Other applications running in the 7535, such as an ANSI session or another TESS
session must each have a different number. In addition, each Psion Teklogix 7535
using the radio link must have a unique number.
6.17.2.1 Host Conn.
Conn Type
The options for this a parameter vary depending on the type of application you are
running – ANSI or TESS.
For TESS applications, this parameter allows you to choose one of the following
types of connections: 802.IQv2,9010t (TCP Direct), 2392/Telnet,
3274/Telnet and 5250/Telnet.
Settings
Note: The “Settings” sub-menu is not available when 802.IQv2 is selected as
the “Conn Type”
Host
This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.###
Port
“Port” specifies the port number. By default, the port is assigned the value 9999.
Conn Type 802.IQv2 see text
Settings » see text
Range
Host Conn
Host see text
Port 9999 0-9999
Range
Settings
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Screen
178 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.17.2.2 Screen
# of Cols
This parameter defines the logical page width (in characters) used by the host
computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this
width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the 7535 display.
Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display.
Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.
# of Rows
This parameter defines the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer
application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This
page length cannot be smaller than the length of the hand-held computer’s display.
Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display.
Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.
Origin Scroll
When enabled (set to “Y”), the display window moves to the origin (upper-left
corner) after “LOCK-H” or “LOCK-B” messages.
Field Scroll
When enabled (set to “Y”), the display window moves to the left after entering a
new entry field.
# of Cols 80 20..132
# of Rows 24 4..100
Origin Scroll N Y/N
Field Scroll N Y/N
Pages Saved 16 1..16
Fields/Page 80 20..80
App. Parameter 0 -1..79
Label F1-6 » see text
Colour Override N» see text
Screen
05 Range
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 179
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Screen
Pages Saved
This parameter determines the number of pages that can be stored and recalled at
the 7535. Storing frequently used page data at the 7535 reduces the need for the host
to retransmit complete page data over the radio link. Retransmitting data can reduce
the system response time. Increasing the number of saved pages decreases the
available memory for other functions.
App. Parameter
The “Application” parameter is sent to the host system as part of the response to
the TESS query command. Enter zero to disable this parameter.
Label F1-F6
Note: This menu uses string entry fields. For detailed information about com-
pleting this type of field, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 135.
Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions
in your application. These keys are identified through softkey labels – reverse video
labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen. These softkey labels can be
reconfigured using the menu attached to the “Label F1-F6” parameter.
To edit a label:
• Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the
Label menu, and type a new name – preferably one that describes
the corresponding key’s function.
Note: Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label, the text
will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display.
F1
•
•
•
F6
Label F1-6
06
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Characters
180 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Colour Override
Foreground And Background
When “Colour Override” is set to ‘Y’, the colours chosen in this menu are displayed
in the TESS sessions. These colour settings override the “Default Colours” set from
within the “View Manager” menu. Refer to “Default Colours” on page 160 for
details.
The allowable values are: Red,Green,Yellow,Blue,Magenta,Cyan,White
and Black.
6.17.2.3 Characters
Char Set
This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix
computer. In this menu, the “Y” or “N” is used to visually guide you to the selected
character set. For example, in the sample menu above, the “Y” next to IBM
indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group.
Foreground Black see text
Background White see text
06 Colour Override
Range
Char Set » see text
V Match Char 0 0..255
H Match Char 0 0..255
Fill Chr 46 0..255
Upper Case N Y/N
Range
Characters
05
ISO N »
IBM Y »
DEC N »
Misc. N »
06 Char Set
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 181
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Characters
To choose a character set:
• Position the cursor on the appropriate item – for example, ISO – and press
<F1> to display the character set options.
• To activate a character set, press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set
it to “Y”.
Important: If you choose a Chinese character set from the ‘Misc.’ menu and
a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the 7535
screen, a shaded box character is used as a substitute. Please
review “Default font” on page 189.
If you are using a Korean character set, a right arrow character is
used as a substitute.
V Match Chr
This parameter enables visible field matching and defines the character that identifies
visible field match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load
data into an entry field that is compared with the user’s input. The hand-held beeps if
the entered data does not match. Visible field matching means that the data to be
matched is displayed in the entry field.
Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to
identify visible match field data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature.
Note: Another method of field matching is available directly through the
TESS data stream.
H Match Chr
This parameter enables hidden field matching and defines the character that identifies
hidden field match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load
data into an entry field that is compared with the user’s input. The 7535 beeps
if the entered data does not match. Hidden field matching means that the data to be
matched is not displayed in the entry field.
Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to
identify hidden match field data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature.
Note: Another method of field matching is available directly through the
TESS data stream.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Tests
182 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Fill Chr
This parameter specifies the character that identifies empty entry fields. Enter
the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. The most commonly used
characters are:
_ (underline) Enter 95
. (period) Enter 46
Note: 7535s in some systems may use the “space” character with the host using
reverse video attributes to mark entry fields.
Upper Case
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), lowercase input is converted
to uppercase.
6.17.2.4 Tests
AutoRep Fn
This parameter determines which function key is sent to the host in auto reply mode.
The value represents the number of the function key – not the ASCII decimal
equivalent. After sending this key, the unit locks and waits for the host to unlock the
7535. To disable “AutoRep Fn”, set the “AutoRep T/O” parameter to zero.
AutoRep T/O
This parameter determines the time (in seconds) between the 7535 unlocking and
the next transmission of the function key specified by the above parameter.
A value of zero disables auto reply mode.
AutoRep Fn 7 0..63
AutoRep T/O 5 0..255
05 Tests Range
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 183
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Features
6.17.2.5 Features
Printer
This parameter enables and disables the pins in the serial port used for printers or
other external devices.
Binary print
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the page displayed on the 7535
computer is spooled as is, except for trailing white-space removal. When disabled
(set to “N”), each line of the page displayed on the hand-held is preceded by a
linefeed (LF) and followed by a carriage return (CR).
Queuing
This parameter enables and disables queuing mode (see “Queuing Mode” on
page 128). It also enables TESS procedures to be loaded into the 7535. This
parameter should be enabled if local procedures and the ability to switch between
hosts within a TESS session are required. Changes to this parameter take effect only
after the 7535 is reset.
Lcl Process – Save on Reset
The menu item “Local Process” has a sub-menu attached to it – “Save on Reset”.
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), data stored in the 7535 is saved if the
unit is reset. Local procedures are defined on page 127.
Printer Y Y/N
Binary print N Y/N
Queuing Y Y/N
Lcl Process Y » see text
Send Mile N Y/N
Next X N Y/N
Kbd Locked N Y/N
Serial » see text
05 Features Range
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Features
184 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Send Mile
This parameter controls the sending of a milestone from the 7535 after a “hey_you”
command. Consult the Teklogix Screen Subsystem (TESS) User Manual for more
information on milestones.
Next X
This parameter enables and disables the next messages used in queuing mode.
Kbd Locked
This parameter allows you to lock (set to “Y”) or unlock (set to “N”) the keyboard
for all alphanumeric input in TESS. When the keyboard is locked, the function
keys, arrow keys and the <ENTER> key are still functional. The 7535 emits
an error beep if a character is rejected because the keyboard is locked. Changes to
this parameter take effect only after the unit is reset.
Serial
Serial Port
TESS print commands control the transfer of data to and from the serial and printer
ports on the 7535. At the 7535 computer, the value assigned at the ‘Serial Port’
parameter ranks which port the TESS print command will identify and use as the
first to fourth port. The allowable options are: Any Available, 1st Serial,
2nd Serial, 3rd Serial, 4th Serial and Disabled.
Serial Port Any Available see text
Serial Out Y Y/N
Serial In N Y/N
SI mode see text
SI prefix 10 0..255
SI suffix 13 0..255
SI CRC N Y/N
SI Fkey 0 0..255
SO prefix 10 0..255
SO suffix 13 0..255
SO CRC N Y/N
06 Serial Range
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 185
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Features
Serial Out
This parameter enables serial port output fields.
Serial In
This parameter enables the serial port input fields. If enabled (set to “Y”), the TESS
application has exclusive use of the serial port. Acceptance of data in a SI field is
determined by the SI prefix and suffix.
SI mode
The possible values for this parameter are field (the default) and command. When
the SI mode is set to field, data received through the serial port is displayed in the
serial input fields. If you are using serial-input fields, make sure the “SI mode”
parameter is set to field.
When “SI mode” is set to command, data received by the serial port is transmitted as
Passthrough data to the host.
Note: “Command” mode is supported by SDKs but not by emulations.
SI prefix
This parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial input. Enter an
ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character. A value of
0 (zero) indicates no prefix.
SI suffix
This parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial input. Enter an
ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character. A value of
0 (zero) indicates no suffix.
SI CRC
This parameter enables or disables CRC validity check on serial input. When
enabled (set to “Y”), a packet is rejected if the CRC is not valid.
Also, when this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), each time a DLE (^P=0x10)
character is encountered in the serial input, it is removed and the character
following it will be replaced with its 1’s complement.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scanner
186 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
SI Fkey
This parameter allows you to choose the function key you want appended to the
serial input. For example, entering a value of “1” appends <F1> to serial input. A
value of “0” (zero) disables this parameter; a suffix is not added.
Note: Data is transmitted as soon as the function key has been appended.
SO prefix
This parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial output. Enter an
ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character. A value of
“0” (zero) indicates no prefix.
SO suffix
This parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial output. Enter an
ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character. A value of
“0” (zero) indicates no suffix.
SO CRC
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), a CRC16 value is appended to the
serial output message.
Also, when this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), for each control character in
the serial output stream, a DLE is inserted to precede that character. The control
character is replaced with its 1’s complement.
6.17.2.6 Scanner
Cont Nxt Fld YY/N
Append Enter Y Y/N
Append F0 Y Y/N
Mixed AIAG N Y/N
Rjct if Alpha N Y/N
Beam Lockout N Y/N
Range
Scanner
05
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 187
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scanner
Cont Nxt Fld
This parameter only applies to string entry data. When enabled (set to “Y”), this
parameter allows bar codes that are longer than the field length to continue in the
next field.
If “ContNxtField” is disabled (set to “N”), OFF data will flow into the next field.
Append Enter
When enabled (set to “Y”), “Append Enter” causes an <ENTER> code to be
appended to the bar code. The <ENTER> code completes the entry of the bar code
and moves the cursor to the next field.
Append F0
When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes an <F0> code to be appended to
the bar code. The <F0> code completes the entry of the bar code data in the field.
Mixed AIAG
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), AIAG labels are always accepted and
processed – even if mixed with keyboard input. The AIAG label can replace the
partially entered keyboard data. If this parameter is disabled, AIAG labels are
rejected if field entry is in progress.
Rjct if Alpha
When the cursor is in a numeric field and “Rjct if Alpha” is enabled (set to “Y”),
bar codes containing alphabetic characters are rejected.
Beam Lockout
When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter disallows scanner use when the current
session is in “LOCK-H” mode.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Fields
188 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.17.2.7 Fields
Field Order
This parameter determines the mode of cursor movement between fields. The next
field can be defined by location on the screen or by the assignment of field numbers.
When enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor moves according to field location. If disabled
(set to “N”), the cursor moves according to the numeric order of the fields.
Enter To F0
The <ENTER> key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the
next field. However, some applications require that the <ENTER> key start a
transmission from the 7535. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes the
<ENTER> key to be interpreted as <F0> which starts a transmission.
Enter On Arr
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the arrow keys can be used to complete
data entry into a field.
Field Order YY/N
Enter To F0 Y Y/N
Enter On Arrow Y Y/N
Video » see text
All Fld Video Y Y/N
Default Font 16x30 see text
Entry Mode field see text
Open Fky Only N Y/N
Ign Bcode_fld N Y/N
Enh Edit Mode N Y/N
Range
Fields
05
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 189
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Fields
Video
Blink
The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be
assigned to fields created with the “Blink” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink),
“ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).
Bold
The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be
assigned to fields created with the “Bold” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink),
“ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).
Reverse
The value assigned to the “Reverse” parameter specifies the actual video attributes
to be assigned to fields created with the “Reverse” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK”
(blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).
All Fld Video
Usually, the video attributes apply only to the text that is in an entry field. When this
parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the entire field (including blanks) takes on the
video attributes. Some systems use this option to identify empty entry fields with
reverse video.
Default font
This parameter determines the default font that appears when the memory is reset.
The allowable values are: 16x30,19x30,19x40,22x15,22x20,22x24,22x30,
22x48,33x30,33x40,33x48,8x15,8x20 (Thai), 9x12 (Arabic),
10x9 (Traditional Chinese), 10x15,11x10 (Korean), 12x24 (Thai), 13x12,
13x15,13x20,14x30,15x21,16x15 (Traditional Chinese), 16x15 (Korean),
16x15 (Simplified Chinese).
• Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the options.
Blink BLNK see text
Bold ULIN see text
Reverse REV see text
Video Range
06
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Anchor View
190 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Entry Mode
“Entry Mode” parameters allow you to select a data entry mode. The modes are:
insert,replace,field and fcursor. “TESS Edit Modes And Cursor
Movement” on page 122 describes these modes in detail.
Open Fky Only
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the screen is open for function keys
only, and the cursor is not positioned. When this parameter is disabled, the screen is
open for data entry, and the cursor is placed in the first field (if it exists).
Ign Bcode_fld
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), fields that were defined as “bar code
only” accept data from the keyboard as well as the bar code reader. In effect, they
behave as data entry fields.
Enh Edit Mode
This mode provides extended (enhanced) functions to users of Psion Teklogix’ IBM
5250 terminal emulation. When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the arrow
keys move the cursor anywhere on the screen, unrestricted by fixed or entry fields.
Certain 5250 emulation keys (e.g. Field Exit) that were originally available only
when “Enh Edit Mode” was set to “Y” are now active at all times in TESS
applications.
Refer to “IBM 5250 Emulation Keys” on page 121 for details about these keys.
6.17.2.8 Anchor View
When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter locks the display at a defined location on
the screen, preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved. The “x origin” and
“y origin” coordinates specify where the screen origin, the upper left corner of the
screen, will be fixed.
x origin 1 1..24
y origin 1 1..80
Anchor Range
05
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 191
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Ports– Tether And Console
x origin and y origin
The “x origin” parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left
corner of the screen will be anchored. The “y origin” parameter is used to specify
the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored.
6.18 Ports– Tether And Console
6.18.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options
The “Tether Port” and “Console Port” options allow you to enable, disable and
specify the accessories attached to these ports. Both the Tether Port and the Console
Port have the same options. These are: Disabled,Serial,Console,Printer
and Scan-See.
To scroll through the options for each port:
• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key.
These ports operate differently depending on the accessories selected.
• Disabled – indicates that the serial port is not being used.
• Serial – standard serial port.
• Console – used to connect another PC to the 7535. A communication
program is required so that communication can proceed between the 7535
and the PC.
• Printer – all TESS print operations are directed to the port. All ANSI media
copy operations to the “primary port” are directed to this port.
• Scan-See – TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Scan-See through the
Tether or Console port.
Tether Port Console
Settings 1 »
Console Port Disabled
Settings 2 »
Ports
03
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings
192 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.18.2 Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings
The parameters for the “Tether Port” and “Console Port” are identical.
Character Set
These menus define the character set for the 7535 port.
Important: When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed, a
right arrow character is used as a substitute.
This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix
computer. In this menu, the “Y” or “N” are used to visually guide you to the selected
character set. For example, in the sample menu above, the “Y” next to IBM
indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group.
Character Set » see text
Baud 9600 see text for range of baud rates
Data Bits 8 6..8
Parity none none odd even mark space
Stop Bits 1 1, 1.5, 2
Flow Ctrl None None Software
Buffer 512 1..2048
Retries 3 1..100
Input Tmo 2 1..100
Output Tmo 5 1..100
Test Y Y/N
Settings Range
04
ISO N »
IBM Y »
DEC N »
Misc. N »
Char Set
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 193
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings
Choosing A Character Set
To choose a character set:
• Position the cursor on the appropriate item – for example, ISO – and press
<F1> to display the character set options.
• To activate a character set, press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set
it to “Y”.
Important: If you choose a Chinese character set from the ‘Misc.’ menu and
a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the screen,
a shaded box character is used as a substitute.
If you are using a Korean character set, a right arrow character is
used as a substitute.
Baud
This parameter determines the bit rate of the port. Allowable values include: 110
300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14.4kbps 19.2kbps 38.4kbps
56.0kbps 57.6kbps 115.2kbps 128.0kbps or 256.0kbps.
Data Bits
This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port.
Possible values are: 6, 7, 8.
Parity
This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going
through the port. The options are: none,odd,even,mark and space.
Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5, 2 – used for
asynchronous communication.
Flow Control
This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your hand-held computer.
The 7535 can perform XON/XOFF (Software) handshaking.
The function of each mode is as follows:
Enable: Used to input and output data.
Supports XON/XOFF or no handshaking.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings
194 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Print: Used to output data only. All input characters except XON and
XOFF are ignored.
Supports XON/XOFF or no handshaking.
Output: Used to output data only. All input characters are ignored.
Supports no handshaking.
Note: To enable the input and/or output, ‘serial in’ and/or ‘serial out’ must be
enabled in the TESS menu.
Buffer
The value assigned to this parameter determines the size of the serial buffer used by
the application for both input and output. The buffer controls the amount of data the
application can send to or receive from a serial device.
Retries
This parameter determines the number of times the 7535 attempts to transmit a byte
from the serial port. If the count specified in this parameter is exceeded, the
transmission fails.
Input Tmo
This parameter sets the time in tenths of a second that the 7535 waits before passing
received data to the TESS or ANSI tasks.
Output Tmo
The value assigned at this parameter determines the maximum number of
milliseconds that the application will wait for a ‘write’ sent to the port to succeed
before it is aborted. The ‘write’ may be one or several bytes in length.
Test
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), data is output through the serial port to
make certain that it is operating appropriately.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 195
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters
6.18.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters
When ‘Scan-See’ is specified as the peripheral for either the Tether or the Console
port, the parameters listed under the “Scan-See” sub-menu are used to tailor the
operation of this type of scanner. The other parameters listed in this menu –
“Character Set”, “Baud” and so on – are identical to those described beginning on
page 191.
6.18.3.1 Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
Character Set »
Baud 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity none
Stop Bits 1
Retries 3
Input Tmo 2
Scan-See »
Scan See
05
Anchor Line 1 0...1
Anchor Column 19 0...19
Follow Cursor Y Y/N
Line Offset 0 -25...25
Column Offset 0 -80...80
Wraparound N Y/N
Panning Y Y/N
Line Scrolling N Y/N
Brightness 3 0 to 5
Arrows Bright Bright Horz Vert
Version 2 0...2
XON/XOFF Y Y/N
05 Scan-See Range
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
196 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
The Scan-See display is mapped to a specific area on the 7535 screen – called
the viewport – and is continuously updated to reflect that portion of the screen. The
Scan-See viewport is defined as follows:
Anchor Line/Anchor Column
A location on the Scan-See display – the anchor – is chosen as a reference point.
Line Offset/Column Offset
A predefined displacement – the offset – is added to the location of the 7535 cursor
to create a point – the pivot. This pivot is mapped to the anchor, and whatever is
displayed in its vicinity is also displayed on the Scan-See.
For example:
•theanchor is chosen as (9,0) whereas “9” is the column and “0” is the line
(on the Scan-See display)
•theoffset is chosen as (4,2)
• the cursor on the 7535 is currently located at (7,5)
•thepivot would thus be located at (7+4, 5+2) or (11,7)
• and so the area displayed on the Scan-See will be:
(11–9,7–0) to (11–9+9,7–0+1) or (2,7) to (11,8). 1
1These computations assume that “Wraparound” (described on page 198) is disabled
(set to “N”) and that “Follow Cursor” (described on page 198) is enabled (set to “Y”).
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 197
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
Note: To enter negative values, press the “-” (minus) key and then, type the
number you want to use.
The <LEFT> arrow key can also be used to decrement the value assigned
to the parameter. Each time the <LEFT> arrow is pressed, the number is
decremented by one. For example, to enter a value of “–5”, start from
zero and press the left arrow key five times.
(9,0)
anchor
Scan-See Display Terminal Display
superimposing
the anchor on the pivot
anchor
pivot
(11,8)
(11,7)
Scan-See Viewport
(2,7)
(11,7)
offset
+4
+2
(4,2)
offset
+4
+2
terminal
cursor
pivot =+ offset
(7,5)
terminal cursor
(0,0)
0123456789101112131415161718192021 . . .
(0,0)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
. . .
0123456789101112131415161718192021 . . .
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
. . .
0123456789
0
1
(0,0)
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
198 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Follow Cursor
When the “Follow Cursor” parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the cursor is always
assumed to be located at the origin. Using the previous example:
• the area displayed will be (4–9,2–0) to (4–9+9, 2–0+1), or, after clipping
values that are negative or higher than 80: (0,2) to (4,3).
Wraparound
When “Wraparound” is enabled (set to “Y”), the Scan-See display is treated as a
one-line by 20 column display, rather than 2 lines by 10 columns.
Panning
If “Panning” is disabled (set to “N”), the Scan-See viewport does not move when the
cursor moves one position to the right, and the pivot is still inside the Scan-See
display. However, the Scan-See display is updated to reflect the changes within that
viewport. If the pivot goes outside the viewport, or if the 7535 display changes
without the cursor being moved, the viewport is re-synchronized to coincide
the pivot with the anchor.
Line Scrolling
When “Line Scrolling” is enabled (set to “Y”), the Scan-See display is treated as
two separate one line by 10 column displays. The top line always displays the
previous value of the bottom line. In an application where the cursor skips from one
entry field to another, the field that the cursor just entered is displayed on the top
line, and the next field is displayed at the bottom.
Note: When this feature is enabled (set to “Y”), the “Panning” option should be
disabled to prevent updates to both lines after every keystroke
Brightness
The “Brightness” parameter controls the backlight brightness of the display. It only
has an effect on Model 7000 Scan-Sees – scanners equipped with LED (light
emitting diode) displays.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 199
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
Arrows
The “Arrows” parameter assigns one of three possible functions to the two arrow
keys on the Scan-See keyboard:
Table 6.6 “Arrow” Parameter Options
Note: For “Horiz” and “Vert,” changing the offset will take effect only after the
7535 display has been updated.
Version
Scan-See units with serial numbers that read 1594120224 or higher contain
firmware that implements a different communication protocol with the 7535
than older units. The “Version” numbers represent the following unit versions:
Table 6.7 Scan-See Versions
Note: To interface the 7535 to the Scan-See units with older firmware
(serial number lower than 1594120224), set “Parity = space”;
all other parameters are identical to the newer firmware.
Value Function
“Bright” Arrow keys control Scan-See display brightness
“Horiz” Arrow keys control “Column Offset”
“Vert” Arrow keys control “Line Offset”
Value Scan-See Version
0• First LED version – up to serial number 1594080275; these are
encased in grey plastic.
1• Model 7000 LED units – versions after the serial number above;
these are also encased in grey plastic.
2• Metrologic 7000M LCD units; these are encased in grey plastic.
• Psion Teklogix 7000M LCD units; these are encased in black plastic.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scan-See Keyboard Mapping
200 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
XON/XOFF
Important: IF YOU ARE USING TRANSCEIVERS WITH YOUR
SCAN-SEE, this parameter must be set to “Y”.
When this parameter is set to “Y”, the XON and XOFF characters are not passed to
the TESS or ANSI tasks. A received XOFF character stops the serial port from
transmitting. A received XON character starts the serial port transmissions again.
6.18.3.2 Scan-See Keyboard Mapping
•Digits (0-9) are passed verbatim
•TheCLR key forces a sign-on message and display refresh. This only
occurs when CLR is pressed and the CLR key on the display is pressed,
then released.
• The three F-keys are mapped to F1, F2 and F3, respectively.
•TheENT key is mapped to the carriage-return (‘\r’) character.
• The two arrow keys are handled locally, and control the brightness, and the
line and column offsets, as described on page 198.
• Bar-code data is stripped off any identifying headers (symbology, etc.)
and passed verbatim.
The Scan-See is capable of displaying only a subset of the default PC-8 ASCII
character set. Any characters that cannot be displayed are currently translated to ‘.’.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 201
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Network
6.19 Network
6.19.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings
This option displays a Windows CE screen where you can set up your radio, launch
an existing network connection or create a new connection.
Figure 6.9 Network Settings
Ctrl Panel »
802.IQv2 »
Network
03
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
NETWLAN – Configuring The Radio
202 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6.19.1.1 NETWLAN – Configuring The Radio
The ‘NETWLAN1’ icon displayed in this window is used to configure the radio
installed in the 7535.
Figure 6.10 NETWLAN Icon
Follow the steps outlined in “Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio” on page 18 for
details about configuring your radio.
6.19.2 802.IQ v2
Important: For setup information about 802.IQ v2, refer to the “9400 and
9450 Network Controllers User Manual” and/or the “9150
Wireless Gateway User Manual”.
Port
“Port” specifies the UDP port used by 802IQ v2. The default value is 8888. Keep in
mind that the value assigned here must match the value set at the network controller.
Note: When using 802.IQ v2, make certain that the 7535 “Net Mask” matches
the network controller net mask.
Port 8888 see text
More Parameters » see text
802.IQ v2 Range
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 203
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
802.IQ v2
More Parameters
Important: The 802.IQ radio items listed in this menu are only available to
Psion Teklogix personnel.
Auto Radio Addr
If this parameter is set to “Y”, the 7535 requests an automatically assigned radio
address.
Note: If ‘Auto Radio Addr’ is enabled (set to “Y”), any value assigned to the
‘Radio Address’ parameter is ignored.
Radio Address
Important: “Radio Address” only takes effect when “Cellular” is
enabled (set to “Y”).
The value entered in the “Radio address” parameter is used to identify the 7535
hand-held over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for
each 7535.
Initial RTT (Round Trip Time)
Round trip time is the elapsed time between a 7535 hand-held computer transmis-
sion and an access point acknowledgement. Each 7535 continuously adjusts the
acceptable round trip time, calculating the average elapsed time over a number of
transmissions. If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average
round trip time calculated, the 7535 will resend the transmission.
Because 7535s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of
transmissions, a starting point or “Initial Round Trip Time” is required. The 7535
uses the time assigned to the “Initial RTT” parameter as a starting value for round
trip calculations. Once the 7535 begins transmitting and receiving data, this value
will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmissions
and acknowledgements.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 205
PERIPHERAL DEVICES & ACCESSORIES 7
7
7.1 External Bar Code Readers..........................207
7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners ......207
7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader...............207
7.2 The 7535 Battery ...............................207
7.2.1 Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions ................208
7.3 Important Charger Safety Instructions ....................209
7.4 Chargers ...................................210
7.5 Gang Charger.................................210
7.5.1 Installation ...............................210
7.5.2 Operator Controls ...........................211
7.5.3 Charge Indicators ...........................211
7.5.4 Charging Batteries ...........................212
7.5.5 Troubleshooting ............................212
7.5.5.1 Excessive Charge Duration ...................212
7.5.5.2 Indicator Flashing Red .....................212
7.5.5.3 Power LED Does Not Light Up.................213
7.5.5.4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed .......213
7.6 Combo Charger................................213
7.6.1 Installation ...............................213
7.6.2 Operator Controls ...........................214
7.6.3 Using the Combo Charger With The 7535...............214
7.6.4 7.2.4 Charging The Spare Battery ...................214
7.6.5 Charge Indicators ...........................215
7.6.6 Troubleshooting ............................215
7.7 Combo Dock .................................216
7.7.1 Installation ...............................216
7.7.2 Using The Combo Dock ........................216
7.7.3 Network Access ............................216
7.7.4 Troubleshooting ............................217
7.8 Quad Dock ..................................217
7.8.1 Installation...............................217
7.8.2 Indicators And Controls ........................218
7.8.3 Using The Quad Dock.........................218
7.8.4 Network Access ............................218
7.8.4.1 Network Addressing ......................218
7.8.5 Battery Charging ...........................219
7.8.6 Troubleshooting ............................219
7.8.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful ..................219
7.8.6.2 7535 LED Does Not Light When Docked ...........219
7.8.6.3 7535 Battery Does Not Charge When Docked .........219
7.9 Portable Docking Module (PDM) ......................219
7.10 Bluetooth Peripherals............................222
7.11 The 7535 Picker Cradle ..........................222
7.11.1 Mounting Recommendations ....................223
7.11.1.1 Mounting Template ......................223
7.11.2 Wiring Guidelines ..........................224
7.11.3 Using The Picker Cradle .......................224
7.11.4 Maintaining The Picker Cradle ...................224
7.11.5 The Powered Cradle Option .....................225
7.11.5.1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle .............225
7.11.6 The Port Replicator .........................226
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 207
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
External Bar Code Readers
7.1 External Bar Code Readers
7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners
Note: Refer to “SE1200 High Performance & Long Range Specs” on page 232
for detailed specifications.
The 7535 supports Psion Teklogix’ PowerScan™ industrial bar code scanner with
standard, long range and extra long range options.
To connect this scanner to the 7535, attach the device to the tether port at the upper-
right side of the 7535. Before using the bar code reader, you may need to change
some parameters. For details, review “Scanner Properties” on page 86 and “Bar
Codes” on page 89.
7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader
Note: For helpful scanning tips, refer to “Scanning Techniques” on page 51.
When a label is scanned successfully, the 7535 will beep if configured appropriately
and the scan LED will flash. Occasionally, the bar code labels are poorly printed or
damaged and cannot be read properly. In this case, use the keyboard to enter data
from the label.
7.2 The 7535 Battery
Note: Battery specifications are detailed in“Lithium-Ion Battery Pack” on
page 240.
7535 Lithium-Ion batteries operate for a minimum of eight hours1 after a charge.
These batteries do not require conditioning. Typical battery life is 300 cycles or 3
years average use. A full charge is completed in 4 hours with a typical charge time
of 1.5 hours.
1Times are approximate and may vary depending on operating conditions.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions
208 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7.2.1 Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions
Important: It is critical that this safety information be reviewed and that all
warnings be strictly followed.
Warning: BATTERIES ARE CONSIDERED HAZARDOUS WASTE and
must be returned to Psion Teklogix for proper disposal. All used
batteries must be forwarded to one of the following offices:
Psion Teklogix Inc. Psion Teklogix Corp.
2100 Meadowvale Blvd. 1810 Airport Exchange Blvd.
Mississauga, Ontario Suite 500
Canada Erlanger, Kentucky
L5N 7J9 USA 41018
Psion Teklogix S.A.
La Duranne; 135 Rue Rene Descartes; BP 421000
13591 Aix-En-Provence
Cedex 3; France
Warning: TO PREVENT the battery from leaking acid, generating heat or
exploding, adhere to precautions listed below.
• The battery incorporates built-in safety devices. To ensure
their proper function, do not disassemble or alter any parts
of the battery.
• Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting any of the exposed
terminals with metal objects such as wire. Do not transport or store the
battery together with metal objects such as necklaces, hair pins, etc.
• Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
• Do not use or leave the battery near a heat source such as a fire
or heater.
• Do not immerse the battery in water.
• When charging, use the battery charger specifically designed for
the battery.
• Do not pierce, strike, throw or step on the battery.
• Do not directly solder the battery.
• Do not connect the battery to an electrical outlet, vehicle
cigarette lighter, etc.
• Do not put battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.
• Do not use the battery in combination with primary batteries (such as
dry-cell batteries) or batteries of different capacities or brands.
• Immediately remove the battery from the device or battery charger
and stop use if the battery gives off an odor, generates heat, becomes
discoloured or deformed, or in any way appears abnormal during use.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 209
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Important Charger Safety Instructions
• Do not continue charging the battery if it does not recharge within the
specified charge time.
• The battery may burst or ignite if the battery leaks. Always ensure that it
is away from any exposed flames.
• If leaking electrolyte sprays into your eyes, rinse them with clean
running water, and immediately seek medical attention.
• Do not store the battery in extremely high temperatures (e.g., a vehicle,
strong direct sunlight, etc.). This may cause the battery to overheat
or ignite, and it may also reduce the performance and service life of
the battery.
• Do not use in areas where static electricity is greater than what the
manufacturer guarantees.
• Keep batteries out of reach of children.
7.3 Important Charger Safety Instructions
•SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS – This manual contains important safety and
operating instructions for battery charger s.
• Before using the battery charger, read all instructions and cautionary
markings on (1) battery charger, (2) battery, and (3) product using battery.
• Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by the battery charger
manufacturer may result in fire, electric shock, or personal injury.
• To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the
charger, pull the plug rather than the cord.
• Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over,
or otherwise subjected to damage or stress.
• Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug.
Replace immediately.
• Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,
or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualified service per-
sonnel.
• Do not disassemble the charger; it should be repaired by qualified service person-
nel. Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire.
• To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the charger from the outlet before
attempting any maintenance or cleaning.
• An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an
improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock.
If an extension cord must be used, make sure:
• The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size,
and shape as those on the charger.
• The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical
condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Chargers
210 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.
• Do not place batteries in the charger if they are cold from extended
exposure to a freezer or outside temperatures below 10°C (50°F). Allow them to
warm up to room temperature for at least two hours.
• Do not use the charger if, after an overnight charge, any of the batteries feel warmer
than the charger housing. The charger should be inspected by
qualified service personnel.
• Do not use the charger if any of the batteries or the charger get more than luke-
warm. The equipment should be inspected by qualified personnel.
7.4 Chargers
Note: The full capacity of the battery may not be reached until at least 5 full
charge/discharge cycles have been performed.
It can take from 1.5 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The 7535’s intelligent charging
system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process
when the battery is at maximum capacity.
Important: To preserve battery integrity, the charger will proceed with a
charge only when the battery temperature falls between 0˚ C and
39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F). If the battery is too hot or cold, the battery
status LED flashes yellow and the charge is suspended.
7.5 Gang Charger
The gang charger is designed to charge up to six 7535 Lithium-Ion batteries at one
time. Your charger is shipped with the appropriate IEC mains power cord. If the
supplied power cord is incorrect for your country, contact Psion Teklogix for
assistance (see Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices).
7.5.1 Installation
The gang charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit – PN TBD – or it
can be operated on a flat surface. Install the charger in an area that is free from
excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The ambient temperature must be in the range
0˚ C to 39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F). The charger will not charge batteries outside
of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that
the charger be operated at room temperature – a temperature range between
18˚ C to 25˚ C (64˚ F to 77˚ F).
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 211
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Operator Controls
The charger can consume up to 2A @ 120VAC or 1A @ 240VAC. Check to ensure
the mains circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading (especially if
several chargers are being powered from the same circuit).
After unpacking the unit:
• Visually check the charger for damage.
• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
A green indicator in the lower-right lights to indicate power is present. All charge
indicators flash momentarily at powerup to indicate that the charger is ready for
operation.
If you choose to wall mount the charger, follow the instructions packaged with the
mounting bracket kit. Be sure to locate the charger in a area where there is no risk of
injury to persons walking in the vicinity.
7.5.2 Operator Controls
The gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch.
7.5.3 Charge Indicators
Each battery charge slot is equipped with a tri-coloured LED to indicate the charge
status of the battery. When 7535 batteries are inserted in the charger, the colour and
behaviour of the LEDs associated with the charge wells in use indicate the status of
the charge.
Table 7.1 Gang Charger Indicators
LED Behaviour Charge Status
Off No battery detected in the slot.
Solid green Battery is fully charged.
Flashing green Battery is charged to 75% capacity.
Solid yellow Charge in progress.
Flashing yellow
Battery temperature out of charge range
between 0˚ C to 39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F).
Charging is attempted every five
minutes until the battery is within the
appropriate temperature range.
Solid red Battery rejected (at insertion) or unable
to complete charge on battery
Flashing red Charging circuit problem. Refer to
“Troubleshooting” on page 212.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Charging Batteries
212 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7.5.4 Charging Batteries
• Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger. Slide the
battery between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place.
The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately.
A solid yellow LED indicates that the battery is being charged. If the battery
temperature is outside 0˚ C to 39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F), the LED flashes yellow until the
temperature is acceptable. A fully discharged battery will normally take between 1.5
and 4 hours to charge. When the battery charge reaches 75%, the indicator flashes
green. At full capacity, it turns solid green.
When the battery is fully charged, the charger stops applying power; the battery
cannot be overcharged if left in the charger slot. The 75% charge indicator is handy
if you need a quick recharge – it often occurs after less than an hour.
7.5.5 Troubleshooting
7.5.5.1 Excessive Charge Duration
The charger is equipped with a recalibration function – a function that fully
discharges and then fully recharges the battery. This process is necessary to
recalibrate the battery capacity gauge internal to the battery. The charger attempts
recalibration when:
• the battery capacity is at less than 30%, and
• the battery has undergone more than 40 partial charge cycles since the last
full discharge.
A complete battery discharge takes between 1.5 and 4 hours to complete. When in
discharge mode, the LED indicator flashes yellow. The recalibration function
extends the charge time by up to 2 hours.
7.5.5.2 Indicator Flashing Red
If the indicator flashes red:
• Remove all batteries and disconnect the mains power cable.
• Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.
If any of the charge slot LEDs continue to flash red, the charger is defective and
requires service. If all indicators are flashing red, there is a power supply problem
and the charger requires service.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 213
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Power LED Does Not Light Up
7.5.5.3 Power LED Does Not Light Up
• Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger.
• Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power.
• Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for
damage.
• Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.
If the power LED still does not light up:
• Unplug the mains cable, and check the fuse at the rear of the charger.
If the fuse appears to be intact, the charger requires service.
7.5.5.4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed
• Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the
charge slot.
• Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the slot.
• Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted
or broken).
• Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot.
• Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the slot indicator flashes
at powerup.
7.6 Combo Charger
The 7535 combo charger is a desktop charger designed to charge the 7535 internal
battery along with a spare battery pack. The combo charger provides sufficient
power to operate and fast charge the 7535 internal battery, while recharging the
spare battery pack.
7.6.1 Installation
Keep the combo charger away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The
combo charger will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of
0˚ C to 39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F). It is recommended that this charger be operated at
room temperature – between 18˚ C and 25˚ C (64˚ F to 77˚ F) for maximum
performance.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Operator Controls
214 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
After unpacking the unit:
• Visually inspect the charger for possible damage.
• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
A green LED in the lower-right corner of the front panel lights to indicate that power
is present. The charge LED flashes momentarily at powerup. The charger is now
ready for operation.
7.6.2 Operator Controls
The combo charger has no operator controls or power switch.
7.6.3 Using the Combo Charger With The 7535
• Gently slide the 7535 into the cradle portion of the combo charger until
lightly latched. An icon is displayed indicating that the 7535 is properly
installed in the combo charger – .
The battery charge LED on the 7535 lights up indicating that the unit has external
power and battery charging may begin. It is safe to leave the 7535 in the combo
charger cradle while it is not in use – the battery will not be overcharged.
7.6.4 7.2.4 Charging The Spare Battery
• Install the battery with the latch facing towards the rear of the charger –
slide it between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place.
The LED for the slot lights up immediately. A solid yellow LED indicates the
battery is being charged. A flashing yellow LED indicates that the battery
temperature is outside the acceptable charge range – between 0˚ C and 39˚ C
(32˚ F to 102˚ F).
A fully discharged battery normally takes between 1.5 and 4 hours to charge. When
the battery capacity reaches 75%, the LED flashes green. When the battery is at full
capacity, the indicator turns solid green.
The combo charger stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged –
there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge slot. The 75%
charge indicator is handy if you need a quick recharge – a quick charge often takes
less than one hour.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 215
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Charge Indicators
7.6.5 Charge Indicators
The spare battery charge slot has an associated tri-colour LED indicator on the
lower-right area of the front panel.
Table 7.2 Combo Charger Indicators
The combo charger supplies DC power to enable the 7535 internal fast charger.
Charge status is displayed on the 7535 charge LED – the lower-right LED. Refer to
“Charge LEDs” on page 46 for details.
Normally, it takes 1.5 and 4 hours to fully charge the 7535 internal battery.
Note: Battery charging continues whether the 7535 is switched on or off.
7.6.6 Troubleshooting
The gang charger troubleshooting section also applies to the combo charger. Refer
to “Troubleshooting” on page 212, for helpful tips.
LED Behaviour Charge Status
Off No battery detected in the slot.
Solid green Battery is fully charged.
Flashing green Battery is charged to 75% capacity.
Solid yellow Charge in progress.
Flashing yellow
Battery temperature outside the charge range of between
0˚ C to 39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F). Charging is attempted every
five minutes until the battery is within the appropriate tem-
perature range.
Solid red Battery rejected (at insertion) or unable to complete charge
on battery.
Flashing red Charging circuit problem. Refer to “Troubleshooting” on
page 212 for details.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Combo Dock
216 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7.7 Combo Dock
The combo dock is identical to the combo charger with one exception – the combo
dock is equipped with a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface. The charging information
in “Combo Charger” beginning on page 213 also applies to the combo dock.
7.7.1 Installation
Refer to the “Installation” guidelines for the combo charger beginning on page 213.
• Attach a CAT5 RJ45 network patch cable (shipped with the combo dock)
between your network and the RJ45 jack on the rear of the dock.
A green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector when a valid network link is
established.
A user application needs to be loaded onto each 7535 that utilizes the combo dock
for communication. With the network connected and this application loaded, the
combo dock is ready for use.
7.7.2 Using The Combo Dock
• Gently slide the 7535 into the cradle portion of the combo dock until
lightly latched. The 7535 detects combo dock and displays the appropriate
icon – .
The battery charge LED (lower-right LED) on the 7535 lights up to show it has
external power and may start charging the battery.
Interaction with the 7535 while in the combo dock is a function of the user
application software used to communicate with the host network.
7.7.3 Network Access
The combo dock includes a dedicated USB to Ethernet converter. This USB
converter appears as a USB slave to the 7535 USB host controller. The 7535
automatically detects insertion into a combo dock and loads the appropriate drivers
to communicate with the USB/Ethernet converter.
See “Network Addressing” on page 218 for details about network addressing issues
with the combo dock.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 217
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Troubleshooting
7.7.4 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting issues for the combo dock are identical to those of the quad dock.
Refer to “Troubleshooting” on page 219 for helpful tips.
7.8 Quad Dock
The Quad Dock permits each of four docked 7535 hand-helds to communicate with
a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet network at greater than 2Mbps. It also provides sufficient
power to operate and fast charge the batteries the 7535s.
7.8.1 Installation
The quad dock should be located away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants.
The ambient temperature must fall between 0˚ C to 39 ˚C (32˚ F to 102˚ F). The
7535 internal charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For
maximum performance, it is recommended that the quad dock be operated at room
temperature – from 18˚ C to 25˚ C (64˚ F to 77˚ F).
The quad dock can consume up to 3A @ 120VAC or 1.5A @ 240VAC. Ensure that
the mains circuit supplying the unit is adequate, especially if several docks are being
powered from the same circuit.
After unpacking the unit:
• Visually inspect the unit for any damage.
• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
A green indicator in the lower-right corner of the front panel lights up to indicate
that power is present.
• Attach a CAT5 RJ45 network patch cable (supplied) between your network
and the RJ45 jack on the rear of the dock.
A green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector when a valid network link is
established.
A user application must be loaded onto each 7535 that utilizes the quad dock for
communication. When the network is connected and this application is loaded, the
quad dock is ready for use.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Indicators And Controls
218 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7.8.2 Indicators And Controls
The quad dock has no user controls. It is equipped with a power indicator LED and
RJ45 link and traffic indicator LEDs. When a valid network link is established, a
green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector.
7.8.3 Using The Quad Dock
• Gently slide the 7535 into the cradle portion of the quad dock until lightly
latched.
The 7535 detects that it is in a quad dock and displays the appropriate icon in the
taskbar – . The battery charge LED on the 7535 lights up to show it has external
power and may start charging the battery.
Interaction with the 7535 while in the quad dock is a function of the user application
software used to communicate with the host network.
7.8.4 Network Access
The quad dock includes a four port 10/100 Ethernet hub. Each of the four
downstream ports are connected to dedicated USB-to-Ethernet converters. These
USB converters appear as USB slaves to the 7535 USB host controller. The 7535
automatically detects insertion into a quad dock and loads the appropriate drivers to
communicate with the USB/Ethernet converters.
7.8.4.1 Network Addressing
Although the USB converters have fixed Ethernet MAC addresses, there is generally
no correlation between these addresses and a specific 7535 hand-held. The host
application uses a standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with
a 7535 on the network.
If a link is established between a 7535 and a host, the application on the host and on
the 7535 must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the 7535 is removed
from the dock and the link is interrupted.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 219
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Battery Charging
7.8.5 Battery Charging
The quad dock supplies DC power to enable the 7535 internal fast charger. Charge
status is displayed on the 7535 charge LED (see “Charge LEDs” on page 46).
Battery charging continues whether the 7535 is switched on or off.
Normally, it takes between 1.5 and 4 hours to fully charge the 7535 internal battery.
7.8.6 Troubleshooting
The indicators, applications and drivers required to use and monitor the docking
station are installed on the 7535 – no indicators or applications are present on the
docking station itself.
7.8.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful
If a network link fails, the 7535 application alerts the operator that the link was
unsuccessful.
7.8.6.2 7535 LED Does Not Light When Docked
TBD
7.8.6.3 7535 Battery Does Not Charge When Docked
TBD
7.9 Portable Docking Module (PDM)
The Portable Docking Module (PDM) clips onto the base of the 7535 and is most
often used to charge the 7535 battery when a desktop charger is not convenient. The
PDM also offers additional communication ports, making it useful for upgrading
software in the 7535 from a USB-equipped laptop computer. Figure 7.2 on page 221
illustrates the connectors on the PDM.
• Align the pins on the PDM with the connectors on the base of the 7535.
• Gently snap the PDM into place on the base of the unit. Figure 7.1 on
page 220 provides a visual representation of how to secure the PDM.
Important: The latching mechanism on the PDM is designed for quick
installation and release. It is not meant for heavy duty use.
Psion Teklogix recommends using a powered cradle or combo
charger in harsh environments.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Portable Docking Module (PDM)
220 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure 7.1 Snapping The PDM To The Base Of The 7535
Align the pins on the PDM with the
connectors on the base of the 7535, and
Connector Pins
gently snap the PDM onto the hand-held.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 221
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Portable Docking Module (PDM)
Figure 7.2 PDM Ports And Connectors
The interfaces available on the PDM are as follows:
• DC power jack (15VDC @ 2.5A)
• USB host port (for connection to USB devices such as a mouse, keyboard,
printer, etc.)
• USB device port (for connection to a USB host such as a PC)
• RS232D DTE serial port (for connection to a PC COM port or a serial
device such as a printer)
The standard Psion Teklogix PDM kit (PN 1030085) includes the necessary DC
power supply, USB cables and RS232D 9-pin cable.
A cigarette lighter adaptor (PN TBD) is also available to connect the PDM to a
vehicle’s power. Use only the recommended adaptor with the PDM – it includes
transient suppressors that protect your 7535 from damage.
The PDM contains reverse polarity and over voltage protection. If the DC power
jack is wired backwards or exceeds 20VDC, the PDM shuts down to protect the
7535, the PDM and the power supply from damage. Psion Teklogix does not
recommend substituting the DC power supply provided with your PDM.
The DC power supplied by the PDM is sufficient to operate the 7535 and fast charge
its internal battery at the same time. The 7535 can run from a PDM without a battery
installed.
Type B USB Device
RS232 Serial Port
Type A USB Host
15 VDC Power Jack
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Bluetooth Peripherals
222 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7.10 Bluetooth Peripherals
If the 7535 is equipped with a Bluetooth radio, it is possible to communicate with a
variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers,
and so on. The range of the Bluetooth radio in the 7535 is limited to approximately
2 meters.
Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below.
If your system is equipped with one of these peripherals, you only need to associate
the peripheral with a specific 7535 host in order to be up and running.
• GSM/GPRS tri-band universal handset (PN TBD)
• Bluetooth printer (PN TBD)
Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11b radios both operate in the 2.4GHz
band. Although the 7535 includes features to minimize interference, performance of
the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically,
when both radios operate in the 7535 at the same time, they cannot transmit
simultaneously – this has a negative impact on overall system throughput. To
minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11b network, Psion Teklogix
recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates (such as
printers and scanners).
Bluetooth peripherals are configured using the Bluetooth control panel applet. See
TBD for more details about Bluetooth device configuration. In addition, review the
manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to
associate with the 7535 host.
7.11 The 7535 Picker Cradle
The 7535 picker cradle is a highly ruggedized, single station dock. Although it
provides quick insertion and removal,, the cradle holds the 7535 securely even when
operated in high vibration environments (such as vehicles not equipped with
suspensions).
The7535 base picker cradle can be outfitted with two options – a power module and
a port replicator. Psion Teklogix also supplies a range of standard mounts for the
hand-held picker cradles, and the 7535 picker cradle is compatible with all of them.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 223
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Mounting Recommendations
7.11.1 Mounting Recommendations
Warning: Before mounting a picker cradle in a vehicle, there are a number
of operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improp-
erly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following:
operator injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction
and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Psion Teklogix strongly
recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the
vehicle manufacturer.
Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consider-
ation, especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices
with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice,
contact Psion Teklogix for assistance (see Appendix A: Support
Services And Worldwide Offices). Note also that for better protec-
tion, the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage.
Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer
optimal operator access. In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with
fully locking joints are recommended. Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum
viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.
The most effective way to mount the picker cradle is to use the four #8-32 threaded
inserts on the rear of the unit. Bolts must not extend more than 10mm (3/8") into the
cradle. All Psion Teklogix mounting hardware is compatible with this method.
Under special circumstances, it may be necessary to mount bolts through the cradle
into a plate. In this case, the cradle requires partial disassembly.
To accommodate the surface loop of the connector cable, leave a 4" clearance at the
bottom of the cradle. Leave a 7" clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy
removal of the 7535. Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged
with the cradle for this application (PN TBD)
7.11.1.1 Mounting Template
The picker cradle is shipped with detailed mounting instructions including a drill
template. [Drawing TBD].
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Wiring Guidelines
224 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7.11.2 Wiring Guidelines
Before installing the cables between the cradle and other devices, consider
the following:
• Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.
• Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.
• Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.
• Use plastic straps to prevent cables and connectors from loosening.
• Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other
potential hazards.
• Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may
damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.
• Leave enough extra cable so that the 7535 can be easily removed.
Note: Where applicable, ensure that the unit is mounted inside the roll cage.
7.11.3 Using The Picker Cradle
If your 7535 is equipped with a shoulder strap or cover, these accessories need to be
removed before installing the unit in a picker cradle. There is no need to remove
handstraps, pistol grips or tethered devices from the unit.
• Slide the 7535 into the cradle, and press downwards until it locks into place.
On a vehicle, it’s a good idea to pull up on the 7535 to be certain that it is
secure.
• To remove the 7535, press on one of the knobs on either side of the cradle
until it releases.
7.11.4 Maintaining The Picker Cradle
Two latches in the cradle hold the 7535 firmly in place. Although these latches are
designed for at least 100,000 cycles, they will wear over time and will no longer
lock the 7535 securely in the cradle. For replacement parts and instructions contact
Psion Teklogix (see Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices). Partial
disassembly is required. The replacement latch components are identified in
drawing # 1020030 Metalwork, part -94.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 225
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
The Powered Cradle Option
7.11.5 The Powered Cradle Option
The powered cradle option is designed to allow the 7535 to be powered by a vehicle
battery. The battery installed in the 7535 is also recharged by the vehicle battery.
This option accepts DC power sources over the range 12V to 90V.
The 7535 picker cradle can be ordered with the powered cradle option installed, or it
can be retrofitted later. If you are retrofitting a power cradle option, the supplied kit
includes detailed installation instructions.
The 7535 charging LED (see Section 3.6.1.1 on page 46) indicates that external
power is available, and it also indicates the charging status of the internal battery.
Warning: Applying a voltage above 90VDC or reversing polarity may result
in permanent damage to cradle power option and will void the
product warranty.
7.11.5.1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle
A 2 meter extension power cable (PN 13985) is supplied with your power cradle.
This cable should be wired to a filtered, fused (maximum 6A) accessory supply on
the vehicle. The power cradle draws no more than 3.5A (less if the accessory
supply is greater than 12V). Any additional wiring, connectors or disconnects used
should be rated for at least 6A.
The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply. The black
lead connects to the negative supply – this should be connected to a proper terminal
block and not to the vehicle body. The power cradle is fully isolated and can be used
with both negative and positive chassis vehicles.
You may have the option of connecting power before or after the ‘key’ switch. It is
preferable to wire the power cradle after the key switch – that is, it cannot be turned
on without the key on. However, if the operator switches the key off repeatedly
during a shift, it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the switch.
If an unfused power source must be used, a fuse assembly (PN 19440) must be
added to the extension power cable (the fuse and instructions are supplied with the
cable). Use only a 5A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
The Port Replicator
226 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7.11.6 The Port Replicator
The port replicator is an optional accessory that allows tethered devices (e.g.,
scanners) as well as mounted peripherals (e.g., bar code printers or weigh scales) to
be attached to the picker cradle. The replicator can be used with or without the
cradle power option.
The functionality of the 7535 tether port is duplicated on the port replicator. When
the 7535 is installed in a port replicated picker cradle, the tether port on the 7535 is
disabled and the tether port on the port replicator is enabled. Although it is not
necessary to remove a device connected to the 7535, keep in mind that it will not
operate while in the cradle.
In addition to the tether port, the replicator is equipped with a standard 9 pin
RS232D serial interface. This interface is typically used for fixed peripherals such as
printers. Your serial device likely includes a suitable cable connector for this port.
A port replicator can be retrofitted onto a cradle power option by replacing the blank
bottom plate with a port replicator assembly using 4 screws. The kit includes the
necessary instructions. Installing a port replicator on an unpowered cradle requires
additional assembly steps. The upgrade kits vary – use PN TBD to upgrade a cradle
power option, and PN TBD to upgrade an unpowered cradle.
An icon in the 7535 task bar indicates that a port replicator has been attached.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 227
SPECIFICATIONS 8
8
8.1 7535 Hand-Held Computer Specifications..................229
8.2 Radio Specifications.............................230
8.3 Bar Code Scanning ..............................230
8.3.1 Internal Scanners............................231
8.3.2 Internal Scanner Port..........................231
8.3.3 External Scanners ...........................231
8.4 Internal Scanner Specifications........................231
8.4.1 SE1200 High Performance & Long Range Specs ...........232
8.4.2 SE1223 Advanced Long Range & SE2223 2-D Specs ........233
8.4.3 Symagery SX4000 & Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager Specs.......234
8.5 External Scanner Specifications.......................236
8.5.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs .........236
8.5.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs.............238
8.6 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack ..........................240
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 229
Chapter 8: Specifications
7535 Hand-Held Computer Specifications
Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change
without notice.
8.1 7535 Hand-Held Computer Specifications
Dimensions
Height TBD
Width
Length
Weight
With batteries 700 grams
Operating System
Microsoft® Windows® CE.net Version 4.10
Processor And Memory
Intel PXA255 400Mhz CPU with 32 MB FLASH and 64 MB RAM standard.
Power Supply
Battery One user accessible, rechargeable lithium-
ion battery pack.
Intelligent fast charge.
Internal fast charger.
Communication
Ports
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0˚C to +50˚C (32˚F to +122˚F)
Short exposure to temperatures outside this
range may cause the 7535 screen to become
very dark or light temporarily.
Long exposure to temperatures below -40˚C
(-40˚F) may damage the screen. Prolonged
exposure to temperatures above +60˚C
(+140˚F) will damage the main battery and
Chapter 8: Specifications
Radio Specifications
230 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
temperatures above +70˚C may damage the
unit (+158˚F).
Storage Temperature -40˚C to 70˚C (-40˚F to 158˚F) without
battery.
-40˚C to 60˚C (-40˚F to 140˚F) with
battery.
Rain And Water Resistance IP 54 Low pressure, vertical spray, no
immersion.
Drop Rate Multiple drops from 2 metres to concrete.
Display
Active Area TBD
Backlight Control
Approvals
TBD
8.2 Radio Specifications
TBD
Transmit Power
Frequency Range
Channels
Data Rates
8.3 Bar Code Scanning
Scanner Types Decoded and non-decoded.
Non-Decoded Codes Supported Code 39, code 128, EAN 13, EAN 8,
EAN 128, UPC-A, UPC-E, Codabar,
Code 93, Code 11, Interleaved 2-of-5,
MSI/PLESSY, Discrete 2-of-5.
Decoded Codes Supported Dependent on external scanner choice.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 231
Chapter 8: Specifications
Internal Scanners
Code Discrimination Automatic for all selected codes, Non-
Decoded input. Decoded input is external
scanner dependent.
8.3.1 Internal Scanners
Base Options High performance, long range, advanced
long range and 2-D raster laser scanner.
Scan Triggering If an aiming dot is available on the installed
scanner, the aiming dot will be enabled for
a configurable time period after which
normal scanning begins. Double-clicking
trigger will override aiming delay and initiate
immediate scan.
8.3.2 Internal Scanner Port
Compatibility Symbol SE1200HP, SE1200LR,
SE1200ALR, SE1200WA SE122x,
SE2223 2-D
8.3.3 External Scanners
Supported Types Decoded and Non-Decoded 5V only.
Interface Via tether port.
8.4 Internal Scanner Specifications
Chapter 8: Specifications
SE1200 High Performance & Long Range Specs
232 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
8.4.1 SE1200 High Performance & Long Range Specs
Table 8.1 SE1200HP And SE1200LR Scanner Specifications
Parameter 7535 High Performance
(SE 1200HP)
7535 Long Range
(SE 1200LR)
Light Source Visible Laser Diode,
675nm ± 5nm Visible Laser Diode,
650nm ± 5nm
Laser Class CDRH Class II
DIN EN 60825: July
1993, Class 2
CDRH Class II
DIN EN 60825: July
1993, Class 2
Laser Power 1.0 mW Max. Average Radiant
Power 1.0 mW Max. Average
Radiant Power
Pulse Power Duration Continuous Continuous
Scan Angle 42˚ ± 2˚23˚ ± 2˚
Scan Repetition 36 ± 3 scans/second
(bidirectional) 36 ± 3 scans/second
(bidirectional)
Skew Tolerance ± 65˚ from normal ± 60˚ from normal
Pitch Angle ± 55˚ from normal ± 65˚ from normal
Roll Tolerance ± 20˚ from vertical ± 10˚ from vertical
Specular Dead Zone ± 2˚ from normal ± 2˚ from normal
Decode Depth of Field Minimum bar width is 5.0 mil
(0.127 mm) Minimum bar width is 10.0
mil (0.254 mm)
Print Contrast
Minimum 20% absolute dark/light reflec-
tive measured at 675 nm. 40% absolute dark/light reflec-
tance measured at 675 nm.
Ambient Light
Immunity Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles
Artificial Light: 450 ft. candles Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles
Artificial Light: 450 ft. candles
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 233
Chapter 8: Specifications
SE1223 Advanced Long Range & SE2223 2-D Specs
8.4.2 SE1223 Advanced Long Range & SE2223 2-D Specs
Parameter 7535 Advanced Long Range
(SE 1200ALR)
7535 2-D
(SE 2223 2-D)
Light Source Visible Laser Diode 650 nm Visible Laser Diode 650 nm
Scan Rate 35 (± 5) scans/sec (bi-directional) 590 scans/sec. 22 frames/sec.
Scan Angle
Horizontal:
Vertical 13º
± 2º 34º
12.5º
Scan Patterns Linear Linear and Smart Raster
Minimum Print
Contrast
Minimum 40% absolute
dark/light reflectance measured
at 650 nm
- 35% absolute dark/light
reflectance differential (PDF)
- 25% absolute dark/light
reflectance differential (1-D)
Symbologies
UPC/EAN, Code 128, Code 39,
Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5,
Codabar, MSI UCC/EAN 128,
TriOptic Code 39
PDF417, Micro PDF,
UPC/EAN, Code 39,
Interleaved 2 of 5, Code 128,
Codabar, MSI Plessey, RSS
and Composite codes
Programmable
Parameters
Laser On Time, Aim Duration,
Power Mode, Trigger Mode,
Bi-directional Redundancy,
Symbology types/lengths, Data
formatting, Serial Parameters,
Beeper Tone
Laser On Time, Aim Duration,
Power Mode, Trigger Mode,
Bi-directional Redundancy,
Symbology types/lengths,
Data formatting, Serial Param-
eters, Beeper Tone, Scan
Angle, Pattern controls
Interfaces
12 position ZIF connector.
Symbol Standard SSI Interface
with logic level serial data com-
munications plus trigger, beeper
and decode LED signals
12 position ZIF connector.
Symbol Standard SSI interface
with logic level serial data
communication plus trigger,
beeper and decode LED
signals
Ambient Light:
Artificial:
Sunlight:
450 ft. candles (4,844 lux)
8,000 ft. candles (86,112 lux) 450 ft.-candles/4,844 lux
8,000 ft.-candles/86,112 lux
with correct enclosure.
Operating Temperature: -22º to 131ºF (-30º to 55ºC) 22º to 140° F/-30º to 60º C @
100% duty cycle
Chapter 8: Specifications
Symagery SX4000 & Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager Specs
234 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Table 8.2 SE1223ALR And SE2223 2-D Scanner Specifications
8.4.3 Symagery SX4000 & Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager Specs
Table 8.3 Internal Image Reader
Storage Temperature: -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C) -40º to 158º F/-40º to 70º C
Humidity: 5% to 95% noncondensing 5% to 95% noncondensing
Power:
Input Voltage:
Input Current:
Standby Current:
5.0 VDC ± 10%
115 mA typical
70 µA max.
±5VDC ± 10%
230mA
6.5mA
Shock 2,000 G 2,000 G
Parameter Symagery SX4000 &
Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager
Technology CMOS image capture
Decode Performance <100ms
First Time Read Rate Performance >98%
Bar Code Orientation 360˚ omni-directional
Upgradeable Symbology Support through firmware
Optical Resolution 1280H x 1024V - SX4000
640H x 480V - IT4200
Depth of Field 10.4cm to 18cm (10 mil)
10cm to 19.3cm (12 mil)
12.7cm to 26.6cm (15 mil)
Field of View 47˚ H x 40˚ V
Min. Contrast Resolution 10%
Aiming LED line
Parameter 7535 Advanced Long Range
(SE 1200ALR)
7535 2-D
(SE 2223 2-D)
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 235
Chapter 8: Specifications
Symagery SX4000 & Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager Specs
Figure 8.1 Pitch, Skew And Specular Dead Zone
Pitch Pitch Angle
Scan Beam
Scan Beam
Scan Pattern
Skew Angle
Barcode Surface
Barcode Surface
Barcode Surface
Scanner
Side View
Top View
Side View
Scanner
Scanner
Skew
Specular Dead Zone < 2
º
Scan Beam Barcode Surface
Side View
Scanner
Roll
Chapter 8: Specifications
External Scanner Specifications
236 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
8.5 External Scanner Specifications
8.5.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs
Communication
Undecoded Standard and Intermec-compatible.
Mechanical
Dimensions 6.9 x 11.2 x 18.3 cm (2.7 x 4.4 x 7.2 in)
Weight Scanner - 280 g (9.9 ozs)
Cable (82.3 cm 32 in) - 176 g (6.2 ozs)
Cable lengths Collapsed: 81 cm (32 in)
Max working: 183 cm (72 in)
Collapsed: 203 cm (80 in)
Max working: 305 cm (120 in)
Electrical
Operating voltage 4 VDC to 14 VDC
Operating current - nominal Undecoded: 75 mA @ 5 VDC
Decoded: 100 mA @ 5 VDC
Idling current - low power mode < 50 µA @ 5 VDC
Optical
Light source Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode
(VLD)
Scan System Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism
Rate 35 scans/sec nominal
Depth of field - Long Range Paper Labels (decoded)
7.5 mil 6 to 10 in (15 to 25 cm)
10 mil 5 to 20 in (13 to 51 cm)
15 mil 5 to 32 in (13 to 81 cm)
20 mil 5 to 48 in (15 to 122 cm)
40 mil 8 to 85 in (20 to 216 cm)
55 mil 15 to 108 in (38 to 274 cm)
Reflective Labels (decoded)
40 mil 22 to 100 in (56 to 254 cm)
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 237
Chapter 8: Specifications
PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs
55 mil 30 to 104 in (76 to 366 cm)
70 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457 cm)
100 mil 45 to 264 in (114 to 671 cm)
Depth of Field-Extra Long Paper Labels (decoded)
Range 15 mil 28 to 60 in (71 to 152 cm)
20 mil 28 to 72 in (71 to 182 cm)
40 mil 28 to 144 in (71 to 144 cm)
55 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457)
Reflective Labels (decoded)
40 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457 cm)
70 mil 80 to 300 in (2032 to 762 cm)
100 mil 80 to 432 in (203 to 1097 cm)
Print Contrast Ratio 25% minimum
Pitch ± 65˚
Skew ± 55˚
Ambient Light Immunity Artificial light: 1200 ft. candles.
Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles.
Environmental
Temperature Rating Operating: -22˚ to 122˚ F (-30˚ to 50˚ C)
Storage: -40˚ to 158˚ F (-40˚ to 70˚ C)
Humidity 5 to 95% NC
Shock (at 23˚ C) Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete.
Vibration Meets MIL-STD-810E
Water and Dust IEC529 rating IP54DW
Decoding Capabilities
Auto-discriminates between: UPC A, E/EAN8, 13/JAN8, 13
(P2/P5, Code 128 EAN add-ons)
Code 128, MSI/Plessey, Code 39, Interleaved
2 of 5, Code 39 Full Ascii,
Standard 2 of 5, Code 93, Codabar,
Chapter 8: Specifications
PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs
238 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Safety/Regulatory
Electrical Complies to: Gost R; TUV; UL; cUL
Emissions Complies to: FCC-A;EN55022-B
BCIQCNS13438; AS/NZS3548;
VCCI-B
Laser Classification CDRH Class 2 (Caution: Laser radiation - do
not stare into beam);IEC60825 Class 2
8.5.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs
Communication
Undecoded Standard and Intermec-compatible.
Mechanical
Dimensions 6.9 x 11.2 x 18.3 cm (2.7 x 4.4 x 7.2 in)
Weight Scanner - 280 g (9.9 ozs)
Cable (82.3 cm 32 in) - 176 g (6.2 ozs)
Cable lengths Collapsed: 81 cm (32 in)
Max working: 183 cm (72 in)
Collapsed: 203 cm (80 in)
Max working: 305 cm (120 in)
Optical
Light source Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode
(VLD)
Scan System Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism
Rate 35 scans/sec nominal
Depth of field - Standard Paper Labels (decoded)
7.5 mil 3.0 to 6 in (9 to 15 cm)
10 mil 1.5 to 15 in (4 to 38 cm)
15 mil 1.0 to 25 in (2.5 to 64 cm)
20 mil 1.0 to 35 in (2.5 to 89 cm)
(paper) 55 mil 6.0 to 60 in (15 to 152 cm)
High Density (decoded)
3 mil 1.0 to 2 in (2.5 to 5.1 cm)
4 mil 1.0 to 3 in (2.5 to 8 cm)
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 239
Chapter 8: Specifications
PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs
5 mil 0.8 to 3.8 in (2 to 10 cm)
7.5 mil 0.6 to 4.5 in (1.5 to 11 cm)
10 mil 0.2 to 5.5 in (0.5 to 14 cm)
Print Contrast Ratio 25% minimum
Pitch ± 65˚
Skew ± 55˚
Ambient Light Immunity Artificial light: 1200 ft. candles.
Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles.
Electrical
Operating voltage 4 VDC to 14 VDC
Operating current - nominal Undecoded: 75 mA @ 5 VDC
Decoded: 100 mA @ 5 VDC
Idling current - low power mode < 50 µA @ 5 VDC
Environmental
Temperature Rating Operating: -22˚ to 122˚ F (-30˚ to 50˚ C)
Storage: -40˚ to 158˚ F (-40˚ to 70˚ C)
Humidity 5 to 95% NC
Shock (at 23˚ C) Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete.
Vibration Meets MIL-STD-810E
Water and Dust IEC529 rating IP54DW
Decoding Capabilities
Auto-discriminates between: UPC A, E/EAN8, 13/JAN8, 13
(P2/P5, Code 128 EAN add-ons)
Code 128, MSI/Plessey, Code 39,
Interleaved 2 of 5, Code 39 Full Ascii,
Standard 2 of 5, Code 93, Codabar,
Safety/Regulatory
Electrical Complies to: Gost R; TUV; UL; cUL
Emissions Complies to: FCC-A;EN55022-B
BCIQCNS13438; AS/NZS3548;
VCCI-B
Laser Classification CDRH Class 2 (Caution: Laser radiation - do
not stare into beam);IEC60825 Class 2
Chapter 8: Specifications
Lithium-Ion Battery Pack
240 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
8.6 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack
Technology Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion)
Operating Temperature -20˚C to 60˚C (-4˚F to 140˚F)
Charge Temperature 0˚C to 39˚C (32˚F to 102˚F)
Storage Temperature -30˚C to 60˚C (-22˚F to 140˚C)
(Storage at elevated temperatures is not
recommended.)
Charge Cycles Minimum of 300 charge cycles with no deg-
radation below 70% of nominal capacity
Charge Time Charge time is typically 1.5 hours.
Voltage 7.4 V nominal (6V min. to 8.4V max.)
Cell Configuration 2 series connected cells
Capacity 1800 mAh nominal at 300mA discharge
20˚C to 6.0V (minimum)
Supported Chargers 6-Gang Charger
Combo Charger
Combo Docking Station
Quad Docking Station
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-1
APPENDIX A
A
SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES
A.1 Support Services
Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its
customers worldwide. These services include post-installation technical support and
product repairs.
A.1.1 Canada and USA: Technical Support and Repair Services
In Canada and the U.S.A. these services can be accessed through the Psion Teklogix
Helpdesk. The Helpdesk coordinates repairs, helps you troubleshoot problems over
the phone, and arranges for technicians or engineers to come to your site.
Canadian and U.S. customers may receive access to technical support services,
ranging from phone support to emergency on-site system support, by calling the
toll-free number below, or via our secure web site.
Note: Customers calling the toll-free number should have their Psion Teklogix
customer number or trouble ticket number available.
Voice: 1 800 387-8898
Fax: 1 905 812-6304
Web Site: http://service.psionteklogix.com
A.1.2 International Support
For technical support outside of Canada or the U.S.A., please contact your local
Psion Teklogix office. See page A-3 for a listing of worldwide offices.
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-3
A.2 WORLDWIDE OFFICES
COMPANY HEADQUARTERS
AND CANADIAN SERVICE CENTRE
Psion Teklogix Inc.
2100 Meadowvale Boulevard
Mississauga
Ontario
Canada L5N 7J9
Tel: +1 905 813 9900
Fax: +1 905 812 6300
Email: salescdn@psion.com
INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES
Psion Teklogix GmbH
Jakob Kaiser Straße 3
D-47877 Willich Münchheide
Deutschland
Tel: +49 2154 9282 0
Fax: +49 2154 9282 59
Email: info@teklogix.de
Psion Teklogix S.A.
La Duranne
135 Rue Rene Descartes
BP 421000
13591 Aix-En-Provence
Cedex 3; France
Tel: +33 (0) 4.42.908.809
Fax: +33 (0) 4.42.908.888
Email: tekeuro@psion.com
Psion Teklogix LTD.
3, Lancaster Court
Coronation Road High Wycombe
Bucks HP123TD, England
Tel: +44 1494 450666
Fax: +44 1494 450155
WWW: www.teklogix.co.uk
Email: tekuk@psion.com
Psion Teklogix AB
Stora Badhusgatan 18-20
411 21 Göthenburg, Sweden
Tel: +46 31 13 15 50
Fax: +46 31 13 57 80
Email: info@teklogix.se
NORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS
AND U.S. SERVICE CENTRE
Psion Teklogix Corp.
1810 Airport Exchange Boulevard
Suite 500
Erlanger, Kentucky
USA 41018
Tel: +1 859 371 6006
Fax: +1 859 371 6422
Email: salesusa@psion.com
Psion Teklogix Finland
Metsänneidonkuja 8
02130 Espoo
Finland
Tel: +358 9 4307 8390
Fax: +358 9 4307 8395
Email: tekeuro@psion.com
Psion Teklogix Danmark
Vesterballevej 4-6
7000 Fredericia
Danmark
Tel: +45 76 24 0133
Fax: +45 75 94 4679
Email: tedk@psion.com
Psion Teklogix Italia S.r.I
Via Galilei, 47
20092 Cinisello Balsamo
Milan, Italy
Tel: +39 2 6604 5410
Fax: +39 2 6604 5412
Email: tkxitalia@psion.com
Psion Teklogix Benelux
Nieuwe weg 1
2070 Zwijndrecht
Belgium
Tel: +32 (0)3 250 22 00
Fax: +32 (0)3 250 22 20
Email: info@psionteklogix.be
Psion Teklogix Inc. (Singapore)
583 Orchard Road
# 15-01 Forum
Singapore 238884
Tel: +65 735 8108
Fax: +65 733 5990
Email: intl@psion.com
Psion Teklogix de Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Sierra Mojada 626, 2º Piso
Col. Lomas Barrilaco, C.P. 11010
Mexico, D.F., Mexico
Tel: ++52 55 5 327 1124
Fax: +52 5 327 1123
Email: salesusa@psion.com
Psion Teklogix do Brasil, Ltda.
Al. Casa Branca, 851 - conj. 101 e 102
São Paulo - SP - 01408-001
Brasil
Tel: +55 11 3064 0868
Fax: +55 11 3068 8198
WWW: www.teklogixbrasil.com.br
Email: tekbr@psion.com
Chile Psion Teklogix International Inc.
Avenida Vitacura 2909, Oficina 703
Las Condes
Santiago, Chile
Tel: +56 2 334 9344
Fax: +56 2 233 3868
Email: ventas@psion.com
A-4Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Psion Teklogix de Argentina, S.A.
Avenida Moreau de Justo 1180
Piso 1, Oficina C-105
Buenos Aires 1107
Argentina
Tel: +54 11 4343 0193
Fax: +54 11 4343 6310
Email: tekar@psion.com
Psion Teklogix España, S.L.
Cityparc Ronda de Dalt
Ctra. Hospitalet 147-149
Edificio Atenas 2˚ 3ª
08940 Cornellà de Llobregat (Barcelona)
España
Tel: +34 9 3475 0220
Fax: +34 9 3475 0230
Email: teklogix@apdo.com
Psion Teklogix Africa
Postnet Suite 39, Private Bag x11
Halfwayhouse, 1685 Ground Floor East
Waterfall Edge Phase 2, Waterfall Park
Bekker Road MIDRAND 1685
South Africa
Tel: 27-11-805-7440/1/2
Fax: 27-11-805-7444
Psion Teklogix Systems India Pvt. Ltd.
M-74, 1st Floor, “M” Block Market
Greater Kailash-Il
New Delhi - 110048
India
Tel: +91 11 621 9257
Fax: +91 11 621 9076
Email: tekind@psion.com
Psion Teklogix B.V.
Venrayseweg 57,
5928 NZ Venlo
Nederlands
Tel: 0031-77-32400.44
Fax: 0031-77-32400.53
A.3 WORLD WIDE WEB
www.psionteklogix.com
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-1
APPENDIX B
B
PORT PINOUTS AND CABLE DIAGRAMS
B.1 7535 Tether Port Pinout
The tether port connector incorporates multiplexed undecoded scanner, decoded
scanner, RS232 serial, and USB interfaces. In order for it to operate, a special
wiring scheme is needed. If you have a need to create cables for the tether port,
contact Psion Teklogix and request document # 1010008 “Instruction Tether Port
Termination”. Attempting to interface to the tether connector without following
this document may cause damage to the 7535 or the tethered device.
B.2 Docking Port & Battery Connector - TBD
Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams
Docking Port & Battery Connector - TBD
B-2 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual I
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
INDEX
# of Cols (ANSI) 164
# of Cols (TESS) 178
# of Pages (ANSI) 163
# of Rows (ANSI) 164
# of Rows (TESS) 178
A
accents, adding (Custom Characters) 157
accessories
bar code readers, connecting 207
hand strap 14
picker cradle (7535) 222
pistol grip 15
Addendum 94, 96, 98, 99
address, IP 19
addresses, network See also Network
addresses 201
Ad Hoc network 21
advanced long range (SE1223ALR)
scanner 233
advanced NETWLAN settings 22
AIAG
AIAG Strip 90
Mixed AIAG 187
AIAG Strip 90
aiming dot, duration of 88
All Fld Video 189
Alpha parameters 134, 138
ALR (advanced long range) scanner 233
ALT Key 39
anchor (viewport) 195
Anchor Column 196
Anchor Line 196
Anchor View
x origin 175, 190
y origin 175, 190
ANSI
# of Cols 164
# of Pages 163
# of Rows 164
Applications menu 160
arrow keys 129
auto-answerback string 167
Auto Term# 162, 176
Group 162, 176
block mode 130, 168–170
Colour Override 166
configuration 128
Conn Type (connection type) 162
CR character 172
device attribute requests 129
device attribute string 167
disabling the keyboard/scanner 172
Edit Modes 173
ENTER key 129, 171
Function key equivalents 129
Group Auto Term# 162, 176
Host (Connection Type) 163
Kbd Modes 170–172
keyboard lock 168
LF character 172
local editing mode 130, 167
Media Copy 168
mnemonics 173
multiple sessions 160
Port 163
sessions, closing 131
sessions, establishing new 131
sessions, listing 131
sessions, moving between 131
settings 161–175
TCP Direct connection 162
Telnet connection 162
Terminal # 162
transmitting data 92, 95, 168
Xmit Modes 166–170
ANSI Settings
Connection Type - Telnet & TCP Direct
162
Screen settings 163
App. parameter 179
appearance (display colour scheme) 79
Append Enter 187
Index
II Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
Append F0 187
appending to bar codes
characters 88, 92, 95
Applications
ANSI Settings 161–175
character attributes (TESS) 180
Character Sets (TESS) 180
Fields parameters (TESS) 188
Host Conn (ANSI) 162
Host Conn (TESS) 177
menu (Applications) 160
Scanner parameters (TESS) 186
Screen parameters (ANSI) 163
Screen parameters (TESS) 178
TESS Settings 176–191
Type and Title 161
approvals
7535 (including scanner) 230
arrow keys 129
completing a data field 122, 188
cycling through special
characters 135, 147
Enh Mode, using 190
in macros 148
moving the cursor 39
Arrow mode 170
Arrows 199
ASCII
decimal equivalents of characters 182
Full Ascii 90
matching fields 181
Async In 174
attributes, video 165, 189
Audio 150
audio indicators
adjusting volume 49
description of beep conditions 49
volume adjustment using the BLUE
key 49
authentication, network (Shared Mode) 28
Auto-Answer 167
Auto Radio Addr 143, 203
AutoRep Fn (function key sent
to host) 182
AutoRep T/O 182
auto tab fields 121
Auto Term# (ANSI) 162, 176
Auto wrap 173
B
backlight
display 77
intensity 43
keyboard 42
backspace (CTRL H) 171
bar code
AIAG 187
appending to 88, 92, 95
connecting bar code reader 207
decodes required 87
decoding edge-to-edge 87
displaying type of bar code 88
external bar code reader 207
parameters 90–107
prefix character 92, 95
Security 87
stripping characters 92, 95
suffix character 92, 95
symbologies
Codabar 99
Code 11 100
Code 128 93
Code 39 90–91
Code 93 99
D 2 of 5 103
EAN 13 94
EAN 8 96
IATA 2 of 5 104
I 2 of 5 101
MSI/Plessy 102
UPC A 97
UPC E 98
bar-code-only fields 121
bar code reader
external (specs) 231
external scanner, operation of 207
integrated scanner, operation of 50
internal or integrated (specs) 231
batteries
a description of 207
capacity dialogue box 83
charging 13, 35
gauge 48
installing 34, 35
installing in 7535 17
power info 68
power saving scheme dialogue box 84
removing 34
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual III
Index
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
run time, maximizing 55
safety precautions 208
specifications 240
battery charger
safety instructions 209–210
battery pack 207–209
battery safety 208–210
battery See also batteries 207
Baud 193
Beam Lockout 187
beep conditions 150
beeper
adjusting volume 49
description of beep conditions 49
volume adjustment using the BLUE
key 49
beeper sounds 150
Beep Tone and Beep Time 150
bell (CTRL G) 171
Binary print 183
BKSP (DEL Key) 39
BKSP/DEL Key
TESS sessions, BKSP key behaviour in
123
TESS sessions, DEL key behaviour in
124
blinking video attribute 165, 189
Block Cursor 154
block mode, ANSI 130, 168–170
bold video attribute 165, 189
Brightness 198
Buffer 194
C
cable diagrams B-1
calibrating (touchscreen) 44, 85
Card Information Structure - CIS
(TRX7431) 144
changing softkey labels (Label F1-F5)
165
changing softkey labels (Label F1-F6)
179
Character parameters (TESS) 180
characters
appending to bar codes 92, 95
Char Set, choosing (TESS) 180
cycling through 135, 147
decimal values of 182
EOB chars 170
EOL chars 169
Lower (ANSI) 174
prefix 92, 95
stripping 92, 95
suffix 92, 95
Upper (ANSI) 174
character set (Tether & Console Port) 192
Character Sets
Host Char Set 174
character sets
choosing in TESS 180
Lower (ANSI) 174
Upper (ANSI) 174
charger
descriptions of 35
safety instructions 209–210
charging (battery) 13
Char Set (TESS) 180
check digit 94, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103
Chk Digit, 1 100, 102
Chk Digit, 2 100
CIS Data (Card Information Structure)
144
Click Data (scanner double-click) 88
Click Time (scanner double-click) 87
CLR/DEL key
Local Echo mode (ANSI) 171
CLR Key 200
Codabar 99
Code 11 100
Code 128 93
Code 39 90–91
Code 93 99
Colour Override 166, 180
Column Offset 196
columns
number of in ANSI screen 164
number of in TESS screen 178
configuring IEEE 802.11 radio 18
configuring softkey labels (Label F1-F5)
165
configuring softkey labels (Label F1-F6)
179
connection, host 162, 177
Conn Type (connection type) 162, 177
Cont Nxt Fld 187
contrast, adjusting 43
contrast, adjusting display 43
control codes 173
Index
IV Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
control panel
accessing 73
advanced setup 86
basic setup 76
Display Properties 76
icons 74
keyboard properties 80
power management properties 83
stylus properties 85
country code 94
CR/LF
CTRL J 171
LF character 172
Newline 172
cradle See also Picker cradle 222
CRC (serial I/O) 185, 186
CTRL commands
CTRL a 131
CTRL c 126
CTRL f 122
CTRL G (Bell) 171
CTRL h 127
CTRL H (Backspace) 171
CTRL h (host select) 126
CTRL i 122
CTRL I (Tab) 171
CTRL J (Line Feed) 171
CTRL K (Vertical Tab) 171
CTRL L 127, 148
CTRL L (Form Feed) 171
CTRL p (reprint) 126
CTRL r 122
CTRL s 125
CTRL s (status, displaying
continuously) 126
CTRL t 125
CTRL t (status, display with unit #) 126
CTRL u 122
CTRL w 125
CTRL w (status, display in Lock B & H
mode) 126
CTRL Key 39
cursor
changing shape of 154
Enh Edit mode 190
field advance (tab) 121
field backspace 121
field exit 121
Field Order 188
home 121
linefeed mode (ANSI) 171
moving between fields 170, 188
newline mode (ANSI) 171
Custom Characters 157
D
data
entering 121, 190
Ign Bcode_fld 190
with a bar code reader 207
serial I/O 185
Serial In/Out 185
transmitting from the terminal 172, 188
transmitting from the 7535 121, 167
Data Bits 193
dead zone 235
decimal values of keys 182
decoding bar codes
decodes required 87
Security 87
decrementing parameters 134, 137
Default Colour 160
Default font 164, 189
DEFAULT key (F3) 114
DEFLT key (F3) 139
DEL (BKSP) Key 39
DEL/CLR key
BKSP key (ANSI) 171
Local Echo mode (ANSI) 171
Dev Attr 167
device attribute requests 129
device attribute string 167
DHCP (IP address) 19
dialogue box, using 68
digit
check digit 94, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103
number system 98, 99
Disable kbd 172
disabling/enabling Y/N parameters 134,
138
Disp controls 173
display
Anchor Column 196
Anchor Line 196
Anchor View 175, 191
appearance (colour scheme) 79
backlight 77
backlight, adjusting 43
Brightness 198
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual V
Index
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
contrast (control panel) 77
contrast, adjusting 43
Display Properties 76
Display Shift 154
Field Scroll 178
ICH/DCH controls 173
Line Scrolling 198
moving 154
Origin Scroll 178
Panning 198
positioning 178
split screens 155
Use Increment 154
video attributes 165, 189
viewport, mapping 195
Wraparound 198
X-Increment 154
Y-Increment 154
display contrast, adjusting 43
displaying TESS version number 125
Display Menu
selecting a TESS session 120
Display menu 132
Display Properties 76
Display Shift 154
docking device icons 49
docking station
uploading data using 57
Dot Time 88
double-click
appending characters to a decoded
bar code 88
scanner trigger 87
D 2 of 5 103
E
EAN/UCC 128 93
EAN 13 94
EAN 8 96
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)
29
Echo Mode 170
Edit extent 173
editing 167
Edit Modes 173
edit modes, TESS 122
empty entry fields 182
emulation keys
field advance (tab) 121
field backspace 121
field exit 121
home 121
tab (field advance) 121
emulation keys, IBM 5250 121
enabling/disabling Y/N parameters 134,
138
End (ANSI) 174
Enh Edit Mode (TESS) 190
ENTER key 129
completing a data field 122
CR/LF character 172
Enter on Arrows 188
Local Echo mode (ANSI) 171
newline mode (ANSI) 171
Xmit Enter 172
Enter On Arr 188
Enter To F0 188
ENT Key 200
entry fields 120
empty fields 182
Function keys 190
hidden match 181
Ign Bcode_fld 190
video attributes 165, 189
visible match 181
Entry Mode 190
entry mode 190
EOB chars 170
EOL chars 169
Erasure Mode 173
Err Accept 91
Error Tone and Error Time 150
ESC Key 40
ESSID (Extended Service Set Identifier)
20
Exp to UPC A 98
Extended Service Set Identifier (ESSID)
20
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
29
F
Fcursor mode 122
features (of 7535) 5
FETM 169
field advance 121
field advance key function 121
field backspace 121
Index
VI Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
field backspace key function 121
field exit key function 121
Field mode 122
Field Order 188
fields
Arrow mode 170
auto-tab fields 121
bar-code-only fields 121
completing a data field 122, 188
Enh Edit mode 190
entry fields 120, 182
field advance (tab) 121
field backspace 121
field exit 121
Field Order 188
Fields/Page 179
Field Scroll 178
Field Size 92
fixed fields 120
hidden match 181
home 121
Ign Bcode_fld 190
“insert” mode 172, 190
match fields 120
number of in screen 179
“replace” mode 172, 190
serial I/O fields 121
Serial In/Out 185
size 92
tab (field advance) 121
“transmit on” 121
video attributes 165, 189
visible match 181
Fields parameters (for TESS Settings) 188
Fill Chr 182
fixed fields 120
F Keys (function keys) 200
Flow Control 193
Follow Cursor 198
font
Default Font 164, 189
Font Chg 152
Font Override 159
fonts, changing 116
Foreground & Background (Colour
Override) 166, 180
Foreground & Background (Default
Colour) 160
Format Effector Transfer
Mode (FETM) 169
form feed (CTRL L) 171
Full Ascii 90
Function Keys 113
softkeys 114
36-key keyboard 114
58-key keyboard 113
Function keys 129
ANSI equivalents 129
auto reply mode 182
completing a data field 122
entering data 190
executing procedures from the
local menu 127
Label F1-F5, changing 165
Label F1-F6, changing 179
Open Fky Only 190
serial I/O 186
G
GATM (Guarded Area Transfer
Mode) 169
Global Macros
adding special characters 147
displaying special characters (ASCII)
147
Group (ANSI Auto Term#) 162, 176
H
hand strap, installing on 7535 14
helpdesk 4, A-1
hidden fields match 181
high performance (SE1200HP) scanner
232
H Match Chr 181
home key function 121
host
multiple hosts 127
selecting a host 127
switching between hosts 183
Host (ANSI Connection Type) 163
Host (TESS Connection Type) 177
Host Char Set 174
Host Connection
ANSI 162
TESS 177
Host echo mode 170
host select (CTRL h) 126
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual VII
Index
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
I
I/O fields 121
IATA 2 of 5 104
IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 121
ICD/DCH controls, displaying 173
IEEE radio, configuring 18
Ign Bcode_fld 190
imager (2D) scanner 53
Inc Country 94
Include Chk 90, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100,
102, 104
Include Chk (D 2 of 5 symbology) 103
Include Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology) 101
Include Sym (Code 128) 93
Inc Num Sys 98, 99
incrementing parameters 134, 137
Indicator 88
Indicators 148
indicators
battery gauge 48
docking devices 49
LED functions 45
modifier keys 48
onscreen 47
radio signal quality 48
scanner message 53
security level 49
status area 119
task bar 64
tethered device 48
Infrastructure network 21
Initial RTT 143, 203
input
bar-code-only fields 121
bar code reader 207
I/O fields 185
Input tmo 194
“insert” mode 172, 190
Open Fky Only 190
Output tmo 194
“replace” mode 172, 190
serial I/O 185
serial I/O fields 121
Serial In/Out 185
Input Tmo 194
Insert mode 122
“insert” mode 172, 190
installation
hand strap 14
pistol grip 15
integrated scanner option 50
Intensity (7035 backlighting) 79, 81
IP address, assigning to radio 19
ITF Chk (D 2 of 5 symbology) 103, 104
ITF Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology) 101
I 2 of 5 101
Short Code 87
K
Kbd lock 168
Kbd Locked 184
Kbd Modes 170–172
keyboard
compatibility with VT220 ANSI
keyboard 129
disabling the keyboard 172
function keys 129
Kbd modes 170–172
key repeat 80, 81
lock 168, 184
lock messages 126
one shot mode 82
36-key keyboard 40
58-key 40
Keyboard (Tekterm) 145
keyboard backlight 42
keyboard keys 37
ALT 39
arrow keys 39
BKSP 39
CTRL 39
DEFAULT key (F3) 114
DEL 39
ESC 40
function keys, accessing 113
LITERAL key (F5) 114
macro keys 115, 145
modifiers 38
navigating using the keyboard 61
NEXT key (F1) 114
one shot mode 82
PREVIOUS key (F2) 114
SAVE key (F4) 114
SCAN 40
SHIFT 39
softkeys 114
SPACE 40
TAB 40
Index
VIII Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
keyboard mapping (Scan-See) 200
keyboard modes 116
Keyboard Properties 80, 81
backlight 81
one shot mode 82
key function
field advance (tab) 121
field backspace 121
field exit 121
home 121
tab (field advance) 121
keys
alpha keys, 36-key keyboard 41
emulation keys, IBM 5250 121
transmit key 168
L
Label F1-F5 165
Label F1-F6 179
labels, changing softkey (Label F1-F5)
165
labels, changing softkey (Label F1-F6)
179
launching
DOS 132
Parameters menu 132
Tekterm 132
Lcl Process 127, 183
LED
charge 46
functions (7535) 45
receive 46
scan 47
transmit 46
LED Scan-See
Brightness 198
LF/CR
CTRL J 171
LF character 172
Newline 172
Line Offset 196
Line Scrolling 198
LITERAL key (F5) 114
Lithium-Ion batteries
installing 35
removing 34
local
editing mode, ANSI 130, 167
Local echo mode 170
menu 127
procedures 127
process 127, 183
Save on Reset 183
“LOCK–B” message 126, 178
locked keyboard 168, 184
locked 7535 182
“LOCK–H” message 126, 178
lock time, decreasing with
queuing mode 128
long range (SE1200LR) scanner 232
Lower (ANSI Host Char Set) 174
M
Macro keys
accessing 115
ASCII characters, entering 147
programming 146
programming special keys 148
text, entering 147
Unicode values, entering 147
36-key keyboard 115
58-key keyboard 115
Macros keys
Macros menu, accessing 145
maintenance (7535) 58
mapping keyboard (Scan-See) 200
mapping viewport 195
match fields 120
MATM 169
Media Copy (ANSI) 168
memory, resetting 139
menu, local 127
Menu mode 118
launching 118
taskbar (switching between apps) 118
menus, working with 133
messages
enabling/disabling next message 184
Indicator 88
“LOCK–B” 126, 178
“LOCK–H” 126, 178
“NEXT–B” 127, 128
“NEXT–H” 127, 128
“RESET: Press Enter” 120
Result 88
scanner warning message 88
TESS status message 125
milestone 184
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual IX
Index
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
Mixed AIAG 187
mnemonics (ANSI) 173
mode
serial I/O 185
Model 7000
Brightness 198
modes, keyboard 116
modifier keys 38
locking 39
One Shot Mode 82
unlocking 39
Mod 10 Chk 91, 104
Mod 10 Chk (D 2 of 5 symbology) 103
Mod 10 Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology) 101
Mod 43 Chk 91
moving the display 154, 178
MSI/Plessy 102
multiple
ANSI sessions 160
applications 160
hosts 127
TESS sessions 160
Multiple Area Transfer
Mode (MATM) 169
N
NETWLAN, advanced settings 22
network
Ad Hoc 21
connection, monitoring 57
control panel settings 201
DHCP 19
ESSID, assigning 20
infrastructure 21
IP address 19
networks to access, specifying 23
preferred 23
type to access 23
Network addresses 201
network authentication (Shared Mode) 28
Newline 172
“NEXT–B” message 127, 128
“NEXT–H” message 127, 128
NEXT key (F1) 114
Next X 184
number
of columns (ANSI) 164
of columns (TESS) 178
of pages (ANSI) 163
of rows (ANSI) 164
of rows (TESS) 178
Terminal # (ANSI) 128, 162
Terminal # (TESS) 120
number system digit 98, 99
numeric fields (Rjct if Alpha) 187
numeric parameters 134, 137
numeric parameters, minimum/maximum
limits to 134, 137
O
Off & On buttons 16, 36
offices list 4, A-3
off-line 7535
using local procedures 127
offset (viewport) 195
OFF Timeout 79
On & Off button 16, 36
one dimensional internal scanner 53
One Shot Mode 82
ON Threshold 78, 81
Open Fky Only 190
order of fields in TESS screen 188
Origin Scroll 178
output/input fields, serial port 185
Output Tmo 194
P
pages
# of Cols (TESS) 178
# of Columns (ANSI) 164
# of Pages (ANSI) 163
# of Rows (ANSI) 164
# of Rows (TESS) 178
Fields/Page (fields per page) 179
positioning 178
queuing mode 128
reprinting 126
size/shape 164
Pages Saved (TESS) 179
Panning 198
parameters
Alpha parameters 134, 138
numeric 134, 137
saving changes to 138
string entry 135, 138, 147
Y/N (boolean) 134, 138
Parity 193
password, supervisor 152
Index
XTeklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
PDF internal scanner 53
period – ASCII decimal equivalent 182
peripherals, defining connections 191
picker cradle 222
installing cable 224
powered 10-55 VDC 222
powered 12 VDC 222
unpowered 222
pinouts B-1
pins – enabling for printing 183
pistol grip, installing on 7535 15
pitch, scanning 235
pivot (viewport) 195
Port (ANSI Connection Type) 163
Port (TESS Connection Type) 177
Port (802.IQ v2) 202
port pinouts B-1
ports
ANSI Connection Type 163
Baud 193
Buffer 194
Data Bits 193
Flow Control 193
Input tmo 194
Output tmo 194
parameters 192
Parity 193
Retries 194
serial 184, 185
Serial In/Out 185
settings 191
settings (tether & console port) 191
settings for Tether and console 192
Stop Bits 193
TESS Connection Type 177
Test 194
Tether and Console Port settings 191
port settings (tether & console) 191–194
position
of screen 178
Power Management Properties 83
battery capacity 83
scheme, power saving 84
Power Mgmt 151
Power Scheme 84
power up 7535 16
preferred networks 23
prefix (serial I/O) 185, 186
Prefix Char 92, 95
PREVIOUS key (F2) 114
PREV key (F2) 134, 137
printing
Binary print parameter 183
pages 126
Printer parameter 183
procedures, local 183
process, local 127, 183
programming macro keys 146
protocol, 802.IQ v1 143
Protocol Type 144
PrtScr key 171
punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT
Key) 39
Q
queuing
enabling/disabling next message 184
mode 128, 183
pages 128
Queuing parameter 127, 183
response time, improving 128
R
radio
Auto Radio Addr (narrow band radio)
203
CIS Data (Card Information Structure)
(TRX7431) 144
configuring 18
Ad Hoc 21
Advanced NETWLAN settings 22
authentication, network 28
EAP (Extensible Authentication
Protocol) 29
ESSID 20
Infrastructure 21
IP address 19
NETWLAN advanced settings 22
network authentication 28
network to access 23
preferred networks 23
saving settings 21
WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy)
Keys 24
Wireless Networks dialogue box 20
Initial RTT (WaveLAN 802.11 DS
SS) 143, 203
Protocol Type 144
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual XI
Index
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
Radio Address (narrow band radio)
203
Radio Address (WaveLAN 802.11 DS
SS) 143
signal quality 48
Radio Addr
Auto Radio Addr (narrow band radio)
203
Radio Address 143, 203
narrow band radio 203
WaveLAN 802.11 DS SS 143
802.IQ v1 143
radio address, automatic (802.IQ v1) 143
radio specifications 230
recalibrating (touchscreen) 44, 85
receive LED 46
Repeat Delay (between key repeats) 81
Repeat Rate (of key repeats) 81
Replace mode 122
“replace” mode 190
reprinting a page 126
“RESET: Press Enter” message 120
resetting
default parameter values 139
TESS session 126
7535 memory 139
resetting the 7535 30
response time, improving with
queuing mode 128
Result (scan) 88
Result Time 88
Retries 194
reverse video attribute 165, 189
Rjct if Alpha 187
rows
number of in ANSI screen 164
number of in TESS screen 178
S
safety instructions
battery charger 209–210
general xii
scanner 50
safety warning, scanner 50
SATM 169
SAVE key (F4) 114
Save on Reset 183
SCAN Key 40
scanner
advanced long range (ALR) 233
aiming (target) dot duration 88
Append Enter 187
Append F0 187
appending data 88
bar code, appending data to 88
Click Data (appending data) 88
Click Time (double-click) 87
Cont Nxt Fld 187
disabling the scanner 172
Dot Time 88
double-click 87
high performance (HP) 232
long range (LR) 232
one dimensional (1D) internal scanner
53
parameters (for TESS Settings) 186
PDF internal scanner dimensional (1D)
53
Result Time 88
safety warnings 50
SE1200HP 232
SE1200LR 232
SE1223ALR 233
SE2223 2-D 233
specifications 231
target dot duration 88
techniques (scanning) 51
TESS Scanner parameters 186
troubleshooting tips 52
two dimensional (2-D) 233
two dimensional (2D) imager scanner
53
warning message 88
2-D (two dimensional) 233
scanning
AIAG 187
aiming (target) dot duration 88
Append Enter 187
Append F0 187
appending characters 88, 92, 95
check digit 94, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103
Click Data (appending data) 88
Click Time 87
Cont Nxt Fld 187
country code 94
Dot Time 88
double-click 87
Indicator 88
locked 7535 187
Index
XII Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
number system digit 98, 99
pitch 235
prefix character 92, 95
removing characters 92, 95
Result 88
Result Time 88
Rjct if Alpha 187
safety instructions 50
Scan-See 191
Security 87
Short Code 87
skew 235
specular dead zone 235
suffix character 92, 95
symbologies 89
target (aiming) dot duration 88
TESS Scanner parameters 186
Verify 87
Scan-See
keyboard mapping 200
parameters, setting 195–200
port settings 191
serial number 199
viewport, mapping 195
Scan Tone and Scan Time 150
screen
stylus, using to navigate 61
touch pen, using 61
Windows CE, navigating 61
Screen parameters
ANSI 163
TESS 178
screens
# of Cols (ANSI) 164
# of Cols (TESS) 178
# of Rows (ANSI) 164
# of Rows (TESS) 178
Anchor View 175, 191
Display Shift 154
Fields/Page 179
Field Scroll 178
moving between fields 170, 188
Origin Scroll 178
page size/shape 164, 178
positioning 178
splitting view of 155
Type and View IDs (Split screen) 155
Use Increment 154
x and y origin 175, 191
X-Increment 154
Y-Increment 154
Screen Switch 152
scrolling
Field Scroll 178
Origin Scroll 178
Security 87
security level icon 49
security settings 140
default mode 151
Font Chg 152
Screen Switch 152
supervisor password 152
user level options 152
Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) 169
select host (CTRL h) 126
selecting a host 127
Send Mile 184
serial I/O
TESS command 185
serial I/O fields 121
Serial In 185
serial number (Scan-See) 199
Serial Out 185
Serial Port 184
serial port
enabling pins for printers 183
I/O fields 185
Serial In 185
Serial Out 185
Serial Port 184
SI CRC 185
SI Fkey 186
SI mode 185
SI prefix/suffix 185
SO CRC 186
SO prefix/suffix 186
service information 4, A-1
Set Mode (SM) control 173
setting the session number 120
SE1200HP 232
SE1200LR 232
SE1223ALR 233
SE2223 2-D 233
Shared Mode (network authentication) 28
SHIFT Key 39
Short Code 87
SI CRC 185
SI Fkey 186
signal quality,radio 48
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual XIII
Index
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
SI mode 185
SI prefix/suffix 185
size
of fields 92
Size/Chars (bar code scanning) 91
skew, scanning 235
Sled See picker cradle. 222
Smart echo mode 170
SO CRC 186
softkey function keys 114
softkeys 149
softkeys (Function keys) 114
softkey labels, changing (Label F1-F5)
165
softkey labels, changing (Label F1-F6)
179
Softkeys (parameter) 149
SO prefix/suffix 186
sound 150
SPACE Key 40
special keys, programming into macros
148
specifications
advanced long range (ALR) scanner
SE1223ALR 233
battery 240
for 7535 229
high performance (HP) scanner
SE1200HP 232
long range (LR) scanner SE1200LR
232
scanner 231
SE1200HP 232
SE1200LR 232
SE1223ALR 233
SE2223 2-D 233
2-D scanner SE2223 2-D 233
specular dead zone 235
Split Screen
dividing and displaying 155
moving the cursor between
split screens 156
parameters used 155
toggling between full and
split screens 156
Type and View IDs 155
using a Wild Card (asterisk) 157
Split Screen 155
Standard (Code 128) 93
Start (ANSI) 174
start up menu 132
status, displaying continuously 126
status, displaying in Lock B & Lock H
mode 126
status, displaying unit # 126
status area (Tekterm) 119
status message, TESS 125
Stop Bits 193
string entry parameters 135, 138, 147
adding special characters to 136
cycling through special characters 135
key function description 135, 138
Strip Leading 92, 95
Strip Trailing 92, 95
stylus (touch pen), using 61
Stylus Properties 85
sub-menus, accessing 133, 137
suffix
serial I/O 186
suffix (serial I/O) 185
Suffix Char 92, 95
support services 4, A-1
Suspend State 85
symbologies
IATA 2 of 5 104
symbologies, bar code 89
displaying type of bar code 88
System Idle State 85
System Menu 65
control panel 66
cycle tasks 68
desktop 66
explorer 66
power info 68
security level 66
system tray 67
task manager 67
System parameters (Tekterm) 145
T
tab (CTRL I) 171
tab (field advance) 121
tab, vertical (CTRL K) 171
TAB Key 40
Tab stop mode 173
target dot, duration of 88
taskbar
onscreen indicators
Index
XIV Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
battery gauge 48
docking devices 49
modifier keys 48
radio signal quality 48
security level 49
tethered device 48
using 64
task manager 67
TCP Direct connection 162, 177
Tekterm 113
Telnet connection 162, 177
terminal
Terminal # (ANSI) 162
Terminal # (ANSI) 162
Terminal # (TESS) 176
TESS 120
# of Cols 178
# of Rows 178
All Fld Video 189
Append Enter 187
Append F0 187
Applications menu 160
BKSP key behaviour 123
Blink (video attrib.) 189
Bold (video attrib.) 189
Colour Override 180
configuration 120
Conn Type (connection type) 177
Cont Nxt Fld 187
CTRL commands 122
cursor movement (in edit modes) 122
DEL key behaviour 124
displaying version number 125
Display menu, using 120
edit modes 122
Enh Edit Mode 190
Enter On Arr 188
Enter To F0 188, 190
Entry Mode 190
Fcursor mode 122
Field mode 122
Field Order 188
Field parameters 188
Host (Connection Type) 177
Ign Bcode_fld 190
Insert mode 122
Kbd Locked 184
keyboard lock 184
matching fields via data stream 181
milestone 184
modes (edit) 122
multiple sessions 160
number of columns in screen 178
number of rows in screen 178
Pages Saved 179
Port 177
query command 179
Replace mode 122
resetting a TESS session 126
Reverse (video attrib.) 189
running multiple sessions 120
selecting a session 120
settings 176–191
status message 125
switching between hosts 183
Terminal # 176
Tests 182
video attributes 189
802.IQ connection 177
9010t connection 177
TESS Settings
character attributes 180
character sets, choosing 180
Connection Type - Telnet & TCP Direct
177
Fields parameters 188
Scanner parameters 186
screen settings 178
Test 194
Tether & Console Port
character set 192
peripheral devices 191
scan-see parameters 195
Tether & Console Ports
Baud 193
Buffer 194
Data Bits 193
Flow Control 193
Input Tmo 194
Output Tmo 194
Parity 193
Retries 194
Stop Bits 193
Test 194
tethered device
connecting and disconnecting 54
taskbar icons 48
threshold, setting (backlight) 78, 81
timeout (backlight) 79
Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual XV
Index
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
touch pen, using 61
touchscreen
recalibration 44, 85
stylus, using 61
touch pen, using 61
Transfer Termination Mode (TTM) 169
transmit LED 46
transmitting data 167, 168, 172, 188
“transmit on” entry field 121
trigger, double-click 87
troubleshooting tips (scanning) 52
TTM 169
turning 7535 off 16
turning 7535 on 16
two dimensional (SE2223 2-D) scanner
233
Type 155
typing in upper case 182
U
UCC 128(Code 128) 93
underline
ASCII decimal equivalent 182
video attribute 165
Unicode values, entering 136, 147
UPC A 97
UPC E 98
Upper (ANSI Host Char Set) 174
Upper Case 182
Use Increment
X-Increment 154
Y-Increment 154
Use increment 154
User Idle State 84
V
Variations (Code 128) 93
Verify 87
Version 199
Version (Scan-See) 199
version number – TESS 125
vertical tab (CTRL K) 171
video attributes 165, 189
All Fld Video 189
Blink 165, 189
Bold 165, 189
Reverse 165, 189
Underline 165
View IDs 155
View mode
exiting 117
fonts, changing 116
font size, changing 116
launching 116
viewport, mapping 195
visible fields match 181
V Match Chr 181
VT220 Function keys – equivalent Psion
Teklogix keyboard Function keys 129
W
warnings 88
warranty 4
website address A-4
WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy),
configuring 24
Windows CE
dialogue box 68
files, folders, & programs, working
with 62
Windows CE, navigating in 61
Wireless Networks dialogue box, using 20
worldwide offices 4, A-3
wrap, auto 173
Wraparound 198
X
X-Increment 154
Xmit Count 167
Xmit Enter 172
Xmit key 168
Xmit Modes 166–170
Xmit Wait 167
XON/XOFF 200
x origin 175, 190, 191
Y
Y/N parameters, enabling and disabling
134, 138
Y-Increment 154
y origin 175, 190, 191
1 Chk Digit 100, 102
1D internal scanner 53
132-col. font 164
2 Chk Digit 100
2-D (SE2223 2-D) scanner 233
Index
XVI Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Boldface indicates a parameter name.
2D imager scanner 53
36-key keyboard
alpha keys, accessing 40, 41
uppercase letters, creating 41
5250 emulation keys 121
58-key keyboard 40
7 bit parameter 168
7535
approvals 230
display 230
off-line 127
specifications 229
7535 picker cradle See also Picker Cradle
222
80-col. font 164
802.IQ connection (TESS) 177
802.IQ v1(protocol)
Auto Radio Addr 143
802.IQ v2 202
802.11b radio, configuring 18
9010t connection (TESS) 177